Mercedes - C 32 AMG - Owners Manual - 2002 - 2002

OM_203.book Seite 1 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 C-Class Operator’s Manual OM_203.book Seite 2 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 C 240 C 320 C 32 AMG OM_203.book Seite 3 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz. Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service. Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time: • Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference. • Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz. • Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants. We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving. DaimlerChrysler AG OM_203.book Seite 1 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Introduction Product information .......................... 7 Operator’s manual ............................. 8 Where to find it ................................ 13 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 15 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls ............... 18 Door control panel .......................20 Overhead control panel ............... 21 Dashboard .....................................22 Center console ..............................24 Operation Vehicle keys ......................................28 Start lock-out ....................................30 General notes on the central locking system ...............30 Central locking system ................... 31 Radio frequency and infrared remote control ............... 31 Locking and unlocking ................33 Contents Choosing global or selective mode on remote control ............. 33 Opening the trunk ....................... 34 Opening and closing windows and sliding / pop-up roof from outside ................................. 35 Panic button ................................. 36 Mechanical keys .......................... 36 Doors ................................................. 37 Central locking switch .................... 39 Automatic central locking .............. 40 Emergency unlocking in case of accident ...................... 40 Trunk ..................................................41 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 43 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 44 Trunk lid release switch ................ 45 Trunk lamp ....................................... 45 Antitheft alarm system ................... 46 Tow-away alarm ............................... 47 Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 48 Front seat adjustment ..................... 49 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints .......... 55 1 Multicontour seat ............................ 57 Heated seats ..................................... 58 Rear seat head restraints ................ 60 Seat belts and integrated restraint system ..........................63 Seat belts ........................................... 63 Seat belt nonusage warning system ...........................64 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ....................70 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ............................... 71 Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ............................. 72 Airbags ..............................................73 Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag .................... 81 Infant and child restraint systems .........................83 Steering wheel adjustment (manual) .......................................88 Steering wheel adjustment (electrical) .................................... 89 Rear view mirrors ............................ 90 OM_203.book Seite 2 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Contents 2 Instrument cluster ...........................98 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display ............... 102 Trip and main odometer and sub menu ............................ 106 Audio systems ................................ 108 Radio ............................................ 108 CD player ..................................... 109 Cassette player ............................110 Telephone .........................................111 Navigation system ...........................116 Trip computer ..................................117 Malfunction/warning message memory .......................119 Individual settings ......................... 121 Setting the audio volume .............. 136 Coolant temperature gauge .......... 137 Flexible service system (FSS) ............................................ 138 Engine oil level indicator .............. 141 Engine oil consumption ................ 142 Exterior lamp switch ..................... 143 Headlamp mode ............................. 144 Night security illumination ......... 146 Locator lighting .......................... 147 Headlamp cleaning system .......... 147 Combination switch ...................... 148 Hazard warning flasher switch ..........................................151 Climate control ...............................152 Automatic climate control .............160 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ..........171 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets ............... 172 Operation Audio and telephone .. 173 Operating safety ............................ 173 Operating and display elements ..174 Button and soft key operation ...... 176 Operation .........................................176 Switching on and off ......................176 Adjusting the volume ................... 177 Audio functions ............................. 177 Bass ................................................. 177 Treble .............................................. 177 Balance ............................................ 178 Centering all audio functions ...... 178 Audio system tone level selection ................... 179 Radio mode ..................................... 179 Selecting radio mode ..................... 179 Selecting the band ......................... 179 Manual tuning ................................ 180 Seek tuning ..................................... 180 Scan tuning ..................................... 180 Weather Band ................................. 181 Station memory .............................. 181 Storing stations automatically (Autostore) ................................. 181 Storing stations .............................. 182 Retrieving a station from memory ............................. 182 Direct frequency input AM and FM only ....................... 182 Cassette mode ................................ 182 Playing cassettes ............................ 182 Cassette eject .................................. 183 Track selection ............................... 184 Track search forwards/backwards ................. 184 Fast forward/reverse ..................... 184 OM_203.book Seite 3 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Scanning ......................................... 185 Scanning ......................................... 185 Dolby NR 1 noise reduction system ............ 185 CD mode .......................................... 186 General notes on CD mode ........... 186 CD changer installed ..................... 187 Loading/emptying the CD magazine ....................... 187 Playing CDs .................................... 188 Skipping tracks forward/backward .................... 188 Fast forward/reverse ..................... 189 Scanning ......................................... 189 Random play/repeat function ...... 189 Direct track selection .................... 190 Track and time display ................. 190 Telephone operation ...................... 190 Switching the telephone on and off ................................... 190 Adjusting the volume .................... 191 Entering telephone number and starting dialing process .... 191 Calling up the phone book ........... 191 Contents Switching between name search and number search ...........................191 Searching and selecting phone book entries by number ..................................192 Placing a call ...................................192 Manual repeat dialing (redial) .........................................193 Automatic repeat dialing (redial) .........................................193 Speed dialing ..................................193 Turbo-dialing ..................................194 Multi party call ...............................194 Accepting incoming call in telephone mode .........................194 Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode ........194 Terminating call .............................195 Muting a call ...................................195 Component malfunctions ..............195 Power windows ...............................197 Sliding/pop-up roof ....................... 200 Interior lighting ............................. 203 3 Rear window sunshade .................205 Sun visors .......................................206 Vanity mirrors ................................206 Interior ............................................207 Storage compartments and armrests ..............................207 Glove box .....................................208 Cup holder ...................................... 211 Ashtrays .......................................... 213 Lighter ............................................. 215 Parcel net in front passenger footwell .......... 216 Ski sack ........................................... 216 Enlarged cargo area .......................221 Split folding rear seat bench ........221 Loading instructions (vehicle with enlarged cargo area) .................223 Cellular telephone .........................224 Telephone, general ........................225 Garage door opener .......................226 OM_203.book Seite 4 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Contents 4 Driving Control and operation of radio transmitters .....................232 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) .................................233 Maintenance ...................................233 Tele Aid ...........................................234 Catalytic converter ........................244 Emission control ............................245 Starter switch .................................246 Starting and turning off the engine ..................................248 Manual transmission ....................249 Automatic transmission ...............251 Parking brake .................................260 Driving instructions ...................... 261 Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ........ 261 Drinking and driving ................. 261 Pedals ........................................... 261 Power assistance ........................262 Brakes ..........................................262 Driving off ...................................263 Parking ........................................264 Tires ............................................. 265 Snow chains ............................... 267 Winter driving instructions ................................ 268 Deep water .................................. 270 Passenger compartment ............271 Traveling abroad .........................271 Cruise control ................................ 272 Brake assist system (BAS) ............ 275 Antilock brake system (ABS) ...........................................276 Electronic stability program (ESP) ........................................... 278 What you should know at the gas station ...................... 282 Check regularly and before a long trip ...................... 284 Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ........ 286 On-board diagnostic system ........ 286 Check engine malfunction indicator lamp ............................ 286 Brake warning lamp ..................288 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp ....289 Fuel reserve warning .................290 ABS malfunction indicator lamp .............................291 Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp ...............292 Seat belt nonusage warning lamp ............................292 Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center console .....................292 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .....292 Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display ...............293 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................295 BATTERY / ALTERNATOR ........296 ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ....297 BRAKE ASSIST ...........................297 BRAKE PAD WEAR ....................298 BRAKE FLUID .............................298 PARKING BRAKE .......................299 OM_203.book Seite 5 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 SEAT BELT SYSTEM ...................299 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. (Electronic stability program) ..300 COOLANT (coolant level) .............................301 COOLANT (coolant temperature) ................302 ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................303 LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................304 LAMP SENSOR ...........................306 DOOR ............................................306 TRUNK OPEN .............................307 HOOD ...........................................307 TELEPHONE – FUNCTION .......308 TELE AID .....................................308 WASHER FLUID ..........................309 RESTRAINT SYSTEM ................. 310 KEY ............................................... 310 FUEL RESERVE .......................... 311 UNDERVOLTAGE ........................ 311 STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. ........... 312 Contents Practical hints First aid kit ......................................314 Stowing things in the vehicle .......314 Fuses ................................................315 Hood .................................................318 Adding engine oil .......................... 321 Automatic transmission fluid level ................................... 322 Coolant level ................................... 322 Adding coolant ........................... 323 Windshield and headlamp washer system ........ 323 Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment ............... 325 TIREFIT, vehicle tools, storage compartment (C 32 AMG only) ....................... 326 Vehicle jack .................................... 327 Wheels ............................................ 328 Tire replacement ....................... 328 Rotating wheels ......................... 329 5 Spare wheel ....................................330 Spare wheel bolts .......................330 Changing wheels ........................... 331 TIREFIT ...........................................337 Tire inflation pressure .................. 341 Battery .............................................342 Jump starting ..................................344 Towing the vehicle .........................347 Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ...................350 Exterior lamps ................................ 351 Replacing bulbs .......................... 351 Standby bulb function ...................356 Changing batteries in the electronic main key ..................357 Synchronizing remote control ............................359 Emergency engine shut-down .....359 Fuel filler flap, manual release ...360 Replacing wiper blade insert .......362 Roof rack .........................................363 OM_203.book Seite 6 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Contents 6 Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle .............................366 Power washer ..............................367 Tar stains .....................................367 Paintwork, painted body components .................................367 Engine cleaning ..........................368 Vehicle washing .........................368 Ornamental moldings ................369 Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses ......................369 Window cleaning ........................369 Wiper blade .................................369 Light alloy wheels ......................370 Instrument cluster .....................370 Steering wheel and gear selector lever ......................370 Cup holder ...................................370 Seat belts ..................................... 371 Headliner and shelf below rear window ........... 371 Leather upholstery ..................... 371 Hard plastic trim items ..............371 Plastic and rubber parts ............371 Technical data Spare parts service ........................374 Warranty coverage .........................374 Identification labels ...................... 375 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............376 Technical data ................................ 377 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. capacities ................................... 381 Engine oils ...................................... 383 Engine oil additives ...................... 383 Air conditioner refrigerant .......... 383 Brake fluid ...................................... 383 Premium unleaded gasoline ........ 384 Fuel requirements ........................ 384 Gasoline additives ......................... 385 Coolants .......................................... 385 Consumer information ................. 387 Uniform tire quality grading ....... 387 Index Index ................................................389 OM_203.book Seite 7 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Product information Kindly observe the following in your own best interest: We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model. We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them. Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed. Introduction 7 OM_203.book Seite 8 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Introduction 8 Operator’s manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, including: • New Car Limited Warranty, • Emission System Warranty, • Emission Performance Warranty, • California, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Massachusetts, and Vermont only), • State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws). OM_203.book Seite 9 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ore more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair and have given us a direct opportunity to perform a repair ourselves, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us of the need for its repair and given us the opportunity to repair ourselves, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calender days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350. Maintenance The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals. Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you. Introduction 9 OM_203.book Seite 10 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Introduction 10 Roadside assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box. Change of address or ownership If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. OM_203.book Seite 11 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: • Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available, • unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts, • gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Introduction In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5 11 OM_203.book Seite 12 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Introduction 12 We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle. If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle. OM_203.book Seite 13 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Where to find it The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections: • Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat. • Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation. • Driving: Important information on driving. • Instrument cluster display: Displays and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions. • Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency. • Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle. • Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here. • Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly. Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment. Explanation of color used: Warning notices for the protection of yourself and others appear on red background. Introduction 13 OM_203.book Seite 14 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Introduction 14 Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us at the following addresses: In the USA: In Canada: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5 OM_203.book Seite 15 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. Introduction 15 OM_203.book Seite 16 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 OM_203.book Seite 17 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls ............... 18 Door control panel .......................20 Overhead control panel ............... 21 Dashboard .....................................22 Center console ..............................24 Contents - Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation Driving 17 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 18 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instruments and controls Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 18 Instruments and controls P 6 8 .1 0 -2 5 9 4 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 19 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 1 Door control panel, see page 20 3 Dashboard, see page 22 2 Overhead control panel, see page 21 4 Center console, see page 24 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 19 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 20 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instruments and controls Door control panel Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 20 1 Door handle, pull to open, see page 37 2 Memory function (for storing seat, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirror settings), see page 95 3 Front seat adjustment switch, see page 49 4 Steering wheel adjustment switch, see page 89 5 Power window switch, see page 197 6 Switch for rear door window override, see page 197 and 199 7 Trunk lid release switch, see page 45 Index OM_203.book Seite 21 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Overhead control panel 1 Interior lighting, see page 203 2 Tele Aid cover (emergency call system), see page 234 3 Sliding/pop-up roof, see page 200 4 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid and optional telephone with voice recognition system 5 Rear view mirror, see page 90 6 Garage door opener, see page 226 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 21 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 22 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Instruments and controls Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 22 Dashboard 1 1 1 2 9 7 5 1 0 8 1 4 6 1 5 1 3 P 6 8 .1 0 -2 5 9 5 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 23 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 1 Hood lock release, see page 318 10 Multifunction steering wheel, see page 102 Horn (with electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2) 2 Parking brake pedal, see page 260 3 Steering wheel adjustment (manual), see page 88 11 Instrument cluster, see page 98 4 Parking brake release, see page 260 5 Exterior lamp switch, see page 143 12 Voice recognition system switch, see separate operating instructions 6 Combination switch, see page 148 13 Starter switch, see page 246 7 Exterior mirror adjustment switch, see page 91 14 Glove box lid release, see page 208 8 Headlamp washer button, see page 147 15 Glove box lock, see page 208 9 Cruise control switch, see page 272 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 23 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 24 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instruments and controls Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 24 Center console 1 Left front seat heater switch, see page 58 2 Rear window sunshade switch (optional), see page 205 3 ESP (electronic stability program) control switch, see page 278 4 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 151 5 Central locking switch, see page 39 6 Rear seat head restraints switch, see page 60 7 Antitheft alarm system, see page 46 Switch for tow-away protection, see page 47 8 Right front seat heater switch, see page 58 9 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see page 292 10 COMAND system (optional), see separate operating instructions, or audio system, see page 173 11 Climate control (C 240), see page 152 Automatic climate control (C 320) see page 160 Rear window defroster, see page 170 P 6 8 .1 0 -2 5 0 1 -2 7 Index OM_203.book Seite 25 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 12 Ashtray, see page 213 14 Storage compartment, see page 209 13 Automatic transmission, see page 251 or Manual transmission, see page 249 15 Armrest, see page 209 Storage compartment, see page 215 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls Operation 25 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 26 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Contents - Operation Operation Vehicle keys ......................................28 Start lock-out ....................................30 General notes on the central locking system ...............30 Central locking system ................... 31 Radio frequency and infrared remote control ............... 31 Locking and unlocking ................33 Choosing global or selective mode on remote control ..............33 Opening the trunk .......................34 Opening and closing windows and sliding / pop-up roof from outside ..................................35 Panic button ..................................36 Mechanical keys ...........................36 Doors ..................................................37 Central locking switch ....................39 Automatic central locking ..............40 Emergency unlocking in case of accident ......................40 Trunk ................................................. 41 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 26 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 43 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 44 Trunk lid release switch ................ 45 Trunk lamp ....................................... 45 Antitheft alarm system ................... 46 Tow-away alarm ............................... 47 Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 48 Front seat adjustment ..................... 49 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints .......... 55 Multicontour seat ............................ 57 Heated seats ..................................... 58 Rear seat head restraints ............... 60 Seat belts and integrated restraint system .......................... 63 Seat belts .......................................... 63 Seat belt nonusage warning system .......................... 64 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ................... 70 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................71 Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ............................ 72 Airbags ..............................................73 Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag .................... 81 Infant and child restraint systems .........................83 Steering wheel adjustment (manual) .......................................88 Steering wheel adjustment (electrical) .................................... 89 Rear view mirrors ............................ 90 Instrument cluster ...........................98 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display ............... 102 Trip and main odometer and sub menu ............................ 106 Audio systems ................................ 108 Radio ............................................ 108 CD player ..................................... 109 Cassette player ............................110 Telephone .........................................111 Navigation system ...........................116 Trip computer ..................................117 Index OM_203.book Seite 27 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Malfunction/warning message memory .......................119 Individual settings ......................... 121 Setting the audio volume .............. 136 Coolant temperature gauge .......... 137 Flexible service system (FSS) ............................................ 138 Engine oil level indicator .............. 141 Engine oil consumption ................ 142 Exterior lamp switch ..................... 143 Headlamp mode ............................. 144 Night security illumination ......... 146 Locator lighting .......................... 147 Headlamp cleaning system .......... 147 Combination switch ...................... 148 Hazard warning flasher switch .......................................... 151 Climate control ...............................152 Automatic climate control .............160 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ..........171 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets ............... 172 Operation Audio and telephone .. 173 Operating safety ............................ 173 Operating and display elements ..174 Button and soft key operation ...... 176 Component malfunctions ..............195 Power windows ...............................197 Sliding/pop-up roof ....................... 200 Interior lighting ............................. 203 Rear window sunshade ................ 205 Sun visors ....................................... 206 Vanity mirrors ............................... 206 Contents - Operation Instruments and controls Operation Interior ............................................207 Storage compartments and armrests ..............................207 Glove box .....................................208 Cup holder ...................................... 211 Ashtrays .......................................... 213 Lighter ............................................. 215 Parcel net in front passenger footwell .......... 216 Ski sack ........................................... 216 Enlarged cargo area .......................221 Split folding rear seat bench ........221 Loading instructions (vehicle with enlarged cargo area) .................223 Cellular telephone .........................224 Telephone, general ........................225 Garage door opener .......................226 27 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 28 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 28 Vehicle keys Warning! Included with your vehicle are 2 electronic keys with integrated radio frequency and infrared remote controls plus removable mechanical key. When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two electronic keys are a different color to help distinguish it. Index OM_203.book Seite 29 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Electronic key When using the mechanical key (2) for lock operations, it can be removed by sliding it out of the remote control. To do so, move locking tab (3) to the right and slide the mechanical key (2) in direction of arrow (4). The remote control transmitter is located in the electronic key. 1 The infrared receivers are located in the front door handles. Note: 3 Remove the mechanical key from the electronic key when using valet parking service. To prevent access to trunk or storage compartments lock them separately 4 P 8 0 .3 5 -2 0 3 1 -2 6 and retain the mechanical key. The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency See page 41 for separate locking of trunk and page 208 and infrared remote control, plus removable mechanical for locking of glove box. key. Obtaining replacement keys The remote control (1) operates all locks on the vehicle. 2 Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking system requiring a special key manufacturing process. For security reasons, replacement keys can only be obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The mechanical key (2) works only in the driver’s door, trunk, and glove box lock. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 29 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 30 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Start lock-out Important! Removing the electronic key from the starter switch activates the start lock-out. The engine cannot be started. Inserting the electronic key in the starter switch deactivates the start lock-out. Note: In case the engine cannot be started (vehicle’s battery is in order), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FORMERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Practical hints Car care Technical data 30 General notes on the central locking system If the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote control. If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked: • Aim transmitter eye at a receiver of either front door handle. Check the batteries of the electronic key, see page 357, or synchronize the electronic key, see page 359. • Use the mechanical key to unlock the vehicle. To start engine, insert the electronic key in the starter switch. There could be a slight delay until the electronic key can be turned in the starter switch. Important! When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key. Index OM_203.book Seite 31 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Central locking system 4 Radio frequency and infrared remote control 3 The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency and infrared remote control. 2 1 Due to the extended operational range of the remote control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button. If one of the transmit buttons is pressed, the battery check lamp lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are in order. See page 357 for checking batteries. 5 P 8 0 .3 5 -2 0 3 2 -2 6 The vehicle doors, trunk and fuel filler flap can be centrally locked and unlocked via remote control. 1 Transmit button ‹ Locking Opening and closing the windows and sliding/pop-up roof can only be done with the infrared portion of the remote control. Aim transmitter eye at a receiver (6 or 7), press and hold transmit button Œ or ‹, see page 35. Œ Unlocking Š Opening trunk (if not separately locked) 2 Lamp for battery check (see page 357 for changing batteries if it does not light up briefly) With vehicle centrally locked, the trunk can also be opened by using the remote control. 3 PANIC button If the electronic key is inserted in starter switch, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked, and the trunk lid cannot be opened with the remote control. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 4 Transmitter eye 5 Locking tab for mechanical key 31 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 32 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 32 6 7 P 8 0 .3 0 -2 1 3 9 -2 6 6 Infrared receiver in driver’s door handle P 8 0 .3 0 -2 1 4 0 -2 6 7 Infrared receiver in front passenger door handle OM_203.book Seite 33 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Locking and unlocking with remote control If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote control, neither door or trunk is opened, the electronic key is not inserted in the starter switch, or the central locking switch is not activated, the vehicle will automatically lock. Unlocking: Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked. The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of unlocking modes (see below): Locking: Press transmit button ‹ once. All turn signal lamps blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked. If they do not blink three times, a door or trunk is not properly closed. Selective unlocking mode – Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door and fuel filler flap. Press transmit button Œ twice to unlock all doors, fuel filler flap, and trunk. Note: Global unlocking mode – Press transmit button Œ once to unlock all doors, fuel filler flap, and trunk. If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change the batteries in the electronic key (if ok, battery check lamp in electronic key will light briefly when pressing transmit button) or to synchronize the remote control, see pages 357 and 359. Notes: If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will remain locked, see page 41. Choosing global or selective mode on remote control The presently active unlocking mode (selective or global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle with the remote control (see below for changing mode). Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation Press and hold transmit buttons ‹ and Œ simultaneously for five seconds to reprogram the remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times indicating the completed mode change. 33 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 34 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 34 Opening the trunk Important! The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should always make sure there is sufficient clearance. Do not place remote control in trunk since trunk is locked when the lid is closed if the vehicle is centrally locked. A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft. (1.75 m) is required to open the trunk lid. Press transmit button Š until trunk lid is open. Notes: If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will remain locked, see page 41. Index OM_203.book Seite 35 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Opening and closing windows and sliding/pop-up roof from outside (summer opening/convenience feature) To interrupt closing procedure, release transmit button. Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle. Aim transmitter eye of remote control at the door receiver. Warning! Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. Summer opening: The sliding/pop-up roof and all side windows can be opened automatically. In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button. To reverse direction of movement press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing. Continue to press transmit button Œ after unlocking the vehicle. The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to open after approximately 1 second. Note: To interrupt opening procedure, release transmit button. If the windows and sliding/pop-up roof cannot be operated automatically by pressing the transmit button of the remote control then it may be necessary to change the batteries in the electronic key (if ok, battery check lamp in electronic key will light briefly when transmitting), or to synchronize the remote control, see page 357 and 359. Convenience feature: The sliding/pop-up roof and the side windows can be closed. Continue to press transmit button ‹ after locking the vehicle. The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after approximately 1 second. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 35 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 36 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 36 Panic button Note: For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 1 (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Mechanical keys P 8 0 .3 5 -2 0 3 5 -2 6 To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps will operate for approximately 3 minutes. To deactivate press button (1) again, or insert electronic key in starter switch. The mechanical keys work only in driver’s door, trunk, and glove box locks. Notes: The mechanical key does not operate the central locking system or antitheft alarm system. The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the mechanical key. If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 360. Index OM_203.book Seite 37 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Doors 4 5 2 3 1 4 Individual door from inside: Push lock button down to lock. 1 Opening – pull handle 2 Unlocking driver’s door 5 Front door from inside: Pull handle to unlock. 3 Locking driver’s door Important! When you lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the door lock button should move down. The mechanical key does not operate the central locking system or antitheft alarm system. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation Each individual door must be locked with the respective door lock button – the driver’s door can only be locked when it is closed. 37 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 38 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the alarm. When opening a front door while the central locking system is in the: • selective unlocking mode, only that individual door is unlocked. The remaining doors, the trunk and fuel filler flap remain locked. • global unlocking mode, all doors, the trunk and fuel filler flap are unlocked. Notes: In case of a malfunction in the central locking system the doors can be locked and unlocked individually. To lock, push down lock buttons or turn mechanical key in driver’s door lock to position 3. In addition lock the trunk. Practical hints Car care Technical data 38 To unlock, pull inside door handles or turn mechanical key in driver’s door lock to position 2. Rear doors can only be opened from inside by first pulling up the door lock button. When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key. Index OM_203.book Seite 39 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Central locking switch If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch, while in the global remote control mode, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside. Notes: If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote control, the doors and trunk cannot be unlocked with the central locking switch. The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch. P 1 Locking 2 Unlocking If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the 5 4 .2 5 -2 4 1 7 -2 6 alarm. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key. Warning! The central locking switch is located in the center console. When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central locking switch, if both front doors are closed. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch, while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 39 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 40 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data 40 Automatic central locking Important! With the automatic central locking system activated, the doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a dynamometer test stand, please, note the following: The automatic central locking function can be switched on or off in the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”, see page 131. Notes: If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch after activating the automatic central locking, and neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked even at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the automatic central locking activated, the door will again be automatically locked at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. With the automatic central locking activated and the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the vehicle doors will lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel spin at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Emergency unlocking in case of accident The doors unlock automatically a short time after an accident in which an airbag or emergency tensioning retractor deploys (this is intended to aid rescue and exit). Index OM_203.book Seite 41 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Trunk The lock is located next to the recessed handle. When the trunk is separately locked, it remains locked when centrally unlocking the vehicle. To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave only the electronic key less its mechanical key with the vehicle. Notes: In case of a malfunction in the central locking system the trunk can be unlocked individually. 0 Neutral position To unlock and open the trunk lid, turn mechanical key to position 2, hold and push to open. 1 Separate locking of trunk – remove mechanical key in this position. The mechanical key does not operate the central locking system or antitheft alarm system. 2 Unlocking When unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. Important! To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key. Do not place mechanical key inside trunk, since trunk is locked again when closing the lid if the vehicle has been previously centrally locked. If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 360. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 41 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 42 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 42 P 8 8 .5 0 -2 1 2 8 -2 6 Pull handle (arrow) to open the trunk lid. The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should always make sure there is sufficient clearance. A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft. (1.75 m) is required to open the trunk lid. Lower trunk lid using handle (1) and close it with hands placed flat on trunk lid. Please remember to keep your fingers out of the space between the lid and the vehicle. OM_203.book Seite 43 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built prior to September 2001) Note: The emergency release button (1) only unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is not in motion. Important! The emergency trunk lid release button (1) does not open the trunk lid, if the trunk has been locked using the mechanical key or the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. Illumination of the emergency release button (1): The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the trunk. The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. The emergency release button (1) is located in the trunk lid. Briefly press emergency release button (1). All doors, the fuel filler flap, and the trunk unlock; and the trunk lid opens. The vehicle production date (e.g. 09/01) can be found on the certification label, which is located on the driver’s door pillar, see page 375. Central locking system Instruments and controls Operation 43 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 44 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Central locking system Trunk lid emergency release (vehicles built September 2001 and later) Practical hints Car care Technical data 44 Important! The emergency trunk lid release button (1) does not open the trunk lid, if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. Illumination of the emergency release button (1): The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the trunk. The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. The emergency release button (1) is located in the trunk lid. Briefly press emergency release button (1). The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid opens. The vehicle production date (e.g. 09/01) can be found on the certification label, which is located on the driver’s door pillar, see page 375. Index OM_203.book Seite 45 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Trunk lid release switch Notes: The trunk can also be opened by using the remote control. Press Š button. The trunk lid cannot be opened by the switch or the remote control when previously locked separately with the mechanical key. To open, see page 41. The trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch when the vehicle was previously locked with the remote control. To unlock vehicle with the remote control, see page 31. Trunk lamp The trunk lamp will switch off after approximately 10 minutes if the trunk lid is left open. The switch is located on the driver’s door. The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should always make sure there is sufficient clearance. A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft. (1.75 m) is required to open the trunk lid. To open the trunk, the vehicle must be at standstill. Press switch until trunk lid is open. The indicator lamp in the switch remains on with trunk lid open. Trunk lamp Instruments and controls 45 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 46 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Antitheft alarm system Antitheft alarm system Practical hints Car care Technical data 46 Operation: Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when someone: • opens a door, • opens the trunk, • opens the hood, • attempts to raise the vehicle. 1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed with the remote control by locking or unlocking the vehicle. The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately 10 seconds after locking the vehicle. A blinking lamp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed. The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid on page 234. Notes: When you unlock the driver’s door with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key. Index OM_203.book Seite 47 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Tow-away alarm The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid on page 234. 2 To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train. 1 Press to switch off tow-away alarm To do so, turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 0, or remove electronic key from starter switch. Press tow-away alarm switch (1). The indicator lamp (2) illuminates briefly. 2 Indicator lamp Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with the electronic key. The switch is located in the center console. The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the vehicle is locked again with the electronic key, at which time it is automatically reactivated. Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when someone attempts to raise the vehicle. Tow-away alarm Instruments and controls 47 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 48 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Easy-entry/exit feature Easy-entry/exit feature (only vehicles with memory function) With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver’s seat moves rearwards. This allows easier entry into and exit from the vehicle when the driver’s door is opened. However, the engine must be turned off. The easy-entry/exit feature can be switched on or off in the individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” – “EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE”, see page 134. When the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch and the driver’s door is closed, the steering wheel and the driver’s seat return to the last position set for it. Practical hints Car care Technical data 48 Warning! You must ensure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and the driver’s seat with the easy-entry/exit feature activated and you open the driver’s door or remove the electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Index OM_203.book Seite 49 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Front seat adjustment When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Warning! The power seats can also be operated with the driver’s or front passenger door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. To operate the front power seat adjustment switches, turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2 (with respective front door open, the power seats can also be operated with the electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0). Never place hands under seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Seats Instruments and controls 49 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 50 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 50 Power seat 2 Seat adjustment, fore/aft Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a comfortable seating position is reached that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls. 3 Seat cushion tilt Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until your legs are lightly supported. 4 Backrest tilt Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. The switches are located in each front door. We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following order: 1 Seat, up/down Press the switch (up/down direction) until comfortable seating position with still sufficient headroom is reached. 5 Head restraint The height of the head restraint is adjusted automatically with the seat so that the back of the head is supported approximately at ear level. Adjust the head restraint using the switch to support the back of your head approximately at ear level. For exterior rear view mirrors, see page 91; inside rear view mirror, see page 90; steering wheel adjustment, see page 89. Index OM_203.book Seite 51 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Storing seat positions: The head restraint, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirror position are stored together with the seat position. See page 95 for notes on the memory function. For recalling a stored seat/head restraint/steering wheel/ and exterior rear view mirror position see page 96. Adjust the head restraint angle by hand. Push or pull the head restraint in direction of arrow. Seats Instruments and controls 51 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 52 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Seats Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 52 Manual seat We recommend to adjust the seat in the following order: 1 Fore/aft adjustment Lift handle (1), slide seat to desired position and allow handle to reengage. Check for proper engagement before driving. 2 Seat cushion tilt Turn handwheel (2) forward or backward. 3 Seat height adjustment Press the switch (3) in the direction of the arrow until your legs are lightly supported. (Standard equipment on model C 240) 4 Backrest tilt Press the switch (4) in the direction of the arrow until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Index OM_203.book Seite 53 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 5 Head restraint height Head restraint inclination Raising: Push or pull the head restraint in direction of arrow. Pull up on head restraint. Lowering: Push button (5) and push down on head restraint. Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level. The head restraint inclination can also be adjusted manually. Seats Instruments and controls 53 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 54 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 54 Important! Warning! Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust if necessary the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and backrest angle to insure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag section on page 73 for proper seat positioning. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rearward vision. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts should be done before the vehicle is put into motion. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Index OM_203.book Seite 55 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints Note: Tilt the backrest rearward for easier removal and installation of the head restraints. Power seat To remove: Press switch (1) upwards and hold until the head restraint is fully extended. Pull head restraint out. To install: Press switch (1) upwards and hold for about 5 seconds. Press the head restraint down until it engages. Adjust head restraint to the desired position. Warning! For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Caution! Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level. Do not remove head restraints except when mounting seat covers. Whenever restraints have been removed be sure to reinstall them before driving. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Seats Instruments and controls 55 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 56 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 56 Manual seat Warning! For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. To remove: Pull head restraint to its highest position. Push button (1) and pull out head restraint completely. To install: Insert head restraint and push it down to the stop. Push button (1) and adjust head restraint to the desired position. Index OM_203.book Seite 57 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Multicontour seat (optional) Some models may be equipped with driver’s multicontour seat. These seats have movable seat cushions and inflatable air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support. The seat cushion movement and amount of backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with regulators (1, 2 and 3) after turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. The side bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with rocker switch (4): • press to the left – increase side support, • press to the right – decrease side support. We recommend to adjust the multicontour seat in the following order: If the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is retained in memory, and automatically adjusts the cushion to this setting when the engine is restarted. 1 Seat cushion depth 2 Backrest bottom 3 Backrest center 4 Side bolster adjustment Seats Instruments and controls 57 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 58 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 58 Heated seats (optional) Press switch to turn on seat heater: 1 Normal seat heating mode. One indicator lamp in the switch lights up. 2 Rapid seat heating mode. Both indicator lamps in the switch light up. After approximately 5 minutes in the rapid seat heating mode, the seat heater automatically switches to normal operation and only one indicator lamp will stay on. Turning off seat heater: If one indicator lamp is on, press upper half of switch. If both indicator lamps are on, press lower half of switch. The front seat heaters can be switched on with the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2. The switch is located in the center console. If left on, the seat heater automatically turns off after approximately 30 minutes of operation. Index OM_203.book Seite 59 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to you, the seat heaters can be switched off. Notes: When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the seat heater longer than necessary. The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too many power consumers are switched on at the same time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs, the indicator lamp in the switch will blink (both indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode). The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. Seats Instruments and controls 59 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 60 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Seats Practical hints Car care Technical data 60 Rear seat head restraints Folding head restraints back with switch in the center console: Folding head restraints back in the rear passenger compartment: Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Push lock button (1). The head restraints will fold backward. Folding head restraints back: Press the symbol-side on the rocker switch to release the head restraints. The head restraints will fold backward for increased visibility. Index OM_203.book Seite 61 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Place head restraints upright Important! For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints. Placing head restraints upright: Pull the head restraint forward until it locks into position. Angle of head restraints: Two different head restraint angle positions are available. Seats Instruments and controls 61 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 62 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Seats Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 62 Head restraint height Raising: Pull up on head restraint. Lowering: Push button (2) and push down on head restraint. Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level. The head restraint inclination can also be adjusted manually. Note: The center rear seat head restraint cannot be adjusted or removed. Index OM_203.book Seite 63 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Seat belts and integrated restraint system Warning! Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats, emergency tensioning retractors for all outboard seat belts, dual front airbags, door mounted side impact airbags, and head protective window curtain airbags. Their protective functions are designed to complement one another. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. Seat belts According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Important! Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require seat belt use. All states and provinces require use of child restraints that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. All child restraints systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly recommend their use. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 63 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 64 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 64 Warning! Seat belt nonusage warning system Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, a warning sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Automatic comfort-fit seat belt: An automatic comfort-fit feature for driver and front passenger seat belt is activated when the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 2. The retraction force of the inertia reel is reduced, increasing the level of seat belt comfort. Note: For cleaning and care of the seat belts see page 371. Index OM_203.book Seite 65 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Warning! Warning! Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 65 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 66 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Fastening seat belts Practical hints Car care Technical data 66 The lap belt should be positioned as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. Warning! Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained – even those sitting in the rear. Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled snug and checked for snugness immediately after engaging it. 1 Latch plate 2 Buckle 3 Release button Push latch plate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause injury. Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it should not touch the neck). For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the belt outlet. Index OM_203.book Seite 67 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Operation of seat belts The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during sudden stops or when quickly pulling on the belt. The locking function of the reel may be checked by quickly pulling out the belt. Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it should not touch the neck). Caution! For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or seat back into positions which could affect the correct seat belt positioning. 4 Button for belt outlet height adjustment To raise, slide belt outlet upward. Unfastening of seat belts To lower, press button (4) and slide belt outlet downward. Press release button (3) in the belt buckle (2). Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate (1). 67 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 68 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Warning! USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY. • Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident. • Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes “SRS” (driver airbag, front passenger airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain airbags for side windows), “ETR” (seat belt emergency tensioning retractors), and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags) and side (side impact and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds. Practical hints Car care Technical data 68 • Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. • Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries. • Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. • Each seat belt should never be used for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects. • Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries. Index OM_203.book Seite 69 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 • Pregnant women should also use a lapshoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in the back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. • Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Warning! Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning. USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 69 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 70 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 70 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system TM Special BabySmart compatible child seats, designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front airbag will not deploy. Warning! The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. The ü indicator lamp located in the center console will be illuminated, except with electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0. The system does not deactivate the door mounted side impact airbag. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of protecting the child. Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats. After turning electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2, the ü indicator lamp located in the center console comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then extinguishes. The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the ü indicator lamp remains illuminated. If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat. See page 292 for notes on the ü indicator lamp. Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat. Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the light remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Index OM_203.book Seite 71 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Seat belt fastened • first threshold exceeded: ETR activates Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were designed to operate, and do not afford any protection whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not designed to deploy. • second threshold exceeded: airbag also activates Seat belt not fastened Front seats: • first threshold exceeded: airbag activates, not ETR The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to activate either the emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the direction and severity of the impact exceeding the preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened. Rear outer seats: • first threshold exceeded: ETR activates Driver and front passenger and rear outer seat systems operate independently of each other. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 71 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 72 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning retractors. These tensioning retractors are located in each belt’s inertia reel and become operationally ready with the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2. The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to activate only when the seat belts are fastened during frontal impacts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS and in rear impacts exceeding a preset severity level. Practical hints Car care Technical data 72 They remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body restricting its forward movement as much as possible. In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, rollovers, certain side impacts, or other accidents without sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner. Note: The front passenger ETR activates only if the front passenger seat is occupied. Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to deploy and the ETR to activate in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold. Index OM_203.book Seite 73 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Airbags 1 Driver airbag Front airbags 2 Front passenger airbag The most effective occupant restraint system yet developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt. In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat belt can be further enhanced by an airbag. In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver and front passenger airbags can provide increased protection for the driver and front passenger in certain frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds. Side impact and head protection window curtain airbags can provide increased protection to belted occupants on the impacted side of the vehicle in side impacts exceeding its preset threshold. P The operational readiness of the airbag system is verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1. When turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2 the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster comes on. If no fault is detected, the 9 1 . 6 0 - 2 2 9 4 - 2 7lamp will go out when the engine is running. After the lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the components and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a malfunction by coming on again. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 73 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 74 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems If the lamp does not come on at all or if it fails to extinguish or if it comes on thereafter, a malfunction in the system has been detected. The following system components are monitored or undergo a self-check: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition circuits, front seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning retractors, seat sensor. Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp has gone out following the initial check, interruptions or short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses, and low voltage in the entire system are detected and indicated. Practical hints Car care Technical data 74 Warning! In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. Note: See page 289 for information on the supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp. Index OM_203.book Seite 75 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 The driver and passenger front airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset threshold. The front passenger airbag deploys only if the front passenger seat is occupied and the ü indicator lamp in the center console is not illuminated. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation Note: Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to deploy in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold. 75 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 76 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Side impact airbags, window curtain airbags Practical hints Car care Technical data 76 The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys only if the front passenger seat is occupied. Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a properly positioned and fastened seat belt. Note: Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the front passenger side impact airbag to deploy in a crash. Window curtain airbag 3 Side impact airbags 4 Window curtain airbags Side impact airbags The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only the side impact airbags on the impacted side of the vehicle deploy. The head protection window curtain airbags afford greater protection against injuries to the head and upper body. They fill up in the area between the A and C pillars (see arrows) between the side windows and an occupant’s head. The window curtain airbags are designed to activate only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only the head protection window curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys. Index OM_203.book Seite 77 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Important! Warning! Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset thresholds. Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which may cause significant injuries, however, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their supplemental protection. The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection. In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other accidents, the airbags will not be activated. The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. The service life of the airbags extends to the date indicated on the label located on the driver side door latch post. To provide continued reliability after that date, they should be inspected by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at that time and replaced when necessary. We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 77 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 78 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags which are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash protection for occupants. Warning! To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belt. For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your body. Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye: Practical hints Car care Technical data 78 • Sit properly belted in an upright position with your back against the backrest. • Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. • Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. • Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front airbag inflates. • Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. Index OM_203.book Seite 79 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 • Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered. Warning! Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn off the passenger side front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off the vehicle’s side impact airbag. • Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized Baby SmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 79 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 80 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly. Practical hints Car care Technical data 80 If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear door mounted side airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written election to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FORMERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details. Index OM_203.book Seite 81 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag • No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the “SRS”, the installation of additional trim material, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, front passenger airbag cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/ electronic equipment on or near “SRS” components and wiring. Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc). Warning! • Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. • Airbags and “ETR’s” are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) that was activated must be replaced. • Do not pass belts over sharp edges. • Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 81 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 82 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems • Do not use handles above doors for placing such items as coat hangers etc. • An airbag system component within the steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has inflated. Do not touch. • Improper work on the system, including incorrect installation and removal, can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the “SRS”. • In addition, through improper work there is a risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Practical hints Car care Technical data 82 • For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning retractor, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. • Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment. When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an “SRS” by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual. Index OM_203.book Seite 83 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Infant and child restraint systems Important! We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints. The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states and all Canadian provinces. Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint. To activate, pull shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner. When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Note: For child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages refer to page 85 (installation of infant and child restraint systems). Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints. Warning! Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 83 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 84 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Warning! Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Practical hints Car care Technical data 84 Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without one. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury. Index OM_203.book Seite 85 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Installation of infant and child restraint systems To secure a tether strap to the anchorage, securely fasten the hook (3), which is part of the tether strap, to the anchorage ring (2). For safety, please make sure that the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch, as illustrated. This vehicle is provided with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions. Prior to installing a tether strap, remove cover (1) from anchorage ring (2) and store in a convenient place (e.g. glove box). After removing the tether strap, reinstall the cover (1). Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 85 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 86 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 86 Child seat mounts - “LATCH” type To install a “LATCH” type child seat, the mounts (1) must be folded forward until they lock in place. To do so, grip inner side of mounts and fold forward. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side mounting fittings (1). To fold mounts (1) back, press down button (2) on each mount and return mount into its catch. 2 1 Non-“LATCH” type child seats may also be used and are capable of being installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. P 9 1 .1 2 -2 2 3 3 -2 6 Note: This vehicle is provided with two “LATCH” (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type mounts (at each of the outer rear seats) for the installation of a “LATCH” child seat having the matching mounting fittings. The mounts can be folded back between the seat cushion and the backrest. With a child seat installed in the left rear seat, the seat belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must operate freely. Guide seat belt between its seat cushion mount and backrest mount along outside of right side child seat mount. Index OM_203.book Seite 87 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Warning! Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced. The “LATCH” mounting fittings are intended for children up to 22 kg (50 lbs) in weight. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without one. Before installing the child seat, make sure the mounting fittings (1) are folded out and locked in place. Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions. The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side mounting fittings (1). An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to your child. Restraint systems Instruments and controls Operation 87 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 88 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Restraint systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 88 Steering wheel adjustment (manual) Unlocking: Pull handle (1) out to its stop. Adjusting: Move steering wheel to the desired position. Locking: Push handle (1) in until it engages. Important! Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked the steering column. See “STEERING WHEEL ADJUST” on page 312 for malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display. P 6 8 .1 0 -2 0 6 6 -2 7 Warning! Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Index OM_203.book Seite 89 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Steering wheel adjustment (electrical) (optional on model C 240) Warning! Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose the control of the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch and lock your vehicle. The steering wheel adjustment feature can also be operated with the driver’s door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. The switch is located on the driver’s door. 1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten column To adjust the steering wheel position, turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. With the driver’s door open, the steering wheel can also be operated with the electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0. Move the switch to the front or rear. 2 Steering column, height Move the switch up or down. Note: The steering wheel adjustment can be stored together with the seat and exterior mirror adjustment. See page 95 for notes on the memory function. Steering wheel adjustment Instruments and controls Operation 89 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 90 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Rear view mirrors Practical hints Car care Technical data 90 Rear view mirrors Note: Inside rear view mirror The automatic antiglare function does not react, if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the mirror. Manually adjust the inside rear view mirror. Inside rear view mirror, automatic antiglare With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in light sensitivity. With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does not respond to changes in light sensitivity. The automatic antiglare function will not react for example, if the rear window sun shade is in the raised position. Warning! In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. Index OM_203.book Seite 91 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Exterior rear view mirrors Exterior rear view mirror adjustment Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Push button to select mirror to be adjusted: Driver’s side – Push button (1). Passenger side – Push button (2). P 0 Push the adjustment button (3) up, down, left or right according to the setting desired. A u to Notes: The exterior rear view mirrors have electrically heated glass. The heater switches on automatically, depending on outside temperature. The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch. The memory button (4) is located on the driver’s door. If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its normal position, it must be repositioned by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place. Warning! Storing exterior rear view mirror positions (only vehicles with memory function) Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Rear view mirrors Instruments and controls Operation The exterior rear view mirror positions are stored in memory with the seat/steering wheel adjustment and can be recalled when necessary. See page 95 for notes on the memory function. 91 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 92 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Rear view mirrors Parking position exterior rear view mirror (only vehicles with memory function) The passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and programmed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers (e.g. to observe the curb or other objects close to the vehicle). With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, and the exterior rear view mirror switch in the passenger side position, the passenger side mirror will be turned downward when placing the gear selector lever in “R” reverse. Practical hints Car care Technical data 92 Note: For activating the mirror adjustment, see under individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” – “MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING”, on page 134. The mirror position can now be adjusted as desired. The passenger side mirror will return to its previous position: • immediately at speeds above approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) – independent of the engaged gear, • after 10 seconds when shifting gear selector lever from “R” Reverse, • by pressing the driver’s side mirror button %. Index OM_203.book Seite 93 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Note: To store passenger mirror parking position: One stored parking position is available for each of the two electronic keys. 1. The vehicle must be stationary. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. This is only possible if you select “ON” in the menu “SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT”. Refer to individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” – “SETTINGS KEYDEPENDENT”, see page 134. 2. Select passenger side mirror & and adjust the mirror to view the curb. 3. Push the memory button “M” (4). 4. Within 3 seconds push bottom of adjustment button (3). The mirror should not move. Repeat the memory procedure if the mirror moves. Rear view mirrors Instruments and controls Operation 93 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 94 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Rear view mirrors Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror, antiglare mode With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in light sensitivity. With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does not respond to changes in light sensitivity. Practical hints Car care Technical data 94 Warning! In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. Note: The automatic antiglare function does not react, if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the inside rear view mirror. The automatic antiglare function will not react for example, if the rear window sun shade is in the raised position. Important! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state, by applying plenty of water. Index OM_203.book Seite 95 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Memory function (model C 320 only, optional on model C 240) Warning! Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Together with the driver’s seat position you can store the positions for steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors. For the front passenger seat you can store the seat position. Three stored positions for the driver’s seat are available for each of the two electronic keys. This is only possible if you select “ON” in the menu “SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT”. Refer to individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” – “SETTINGS KEYDEPENDENT”, see page 134. The memory and stored position buttons are located on the doors. 1 Memory button, used to store selected positions which can be retrieved by pressing 2 Stored position button Turn to position “1”, “2”, or “3” Memory function Instruments and controls 95 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 96 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Memory function Practical hints Car care Technical data 96 Storing positions into memory: Recalling positions from memory: With the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2 or with the relevant door open and the electronic key inserted in the starter switch. To recall a seat /steering wheel/exterior rear view mirror position, turn button (2) to selected memory position and press to recall. Adjust the seat to the desired position. The seat/ steering wheel/exterior rear view mirror movement stops when the button is released. Driver’s seat: You can also adjust the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors electrically for the driver’s seat. See page 91 for exterior rear view mirror adjustment and page 89 for steering wheel adjustment. Turn button (2) to selected memory position. Push memory button (1), release and push the position button (2) within 3 seconds. Caution! Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats. First move backrest to an upright position. Index OM_203.book Seite 97 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Important! Warning! Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust if necessary the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and backrest angle to insure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag section for proper seat positioning. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result. In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rearward vision. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts should be done before the vehicle is put into motion. Memory function Instruments and controls A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. 97 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 98 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster Instrument cluster Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints 98 Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 99 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 11 Indicator lamp without function. It illuminates with the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It should go out when the engine is running. 1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination, see page 100 Reset knob for trip odometer, see page 101 and individual settings, see page 121 12 Multifunction display, see page 102. Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display, see page 293 2 Tachometer 3 Antilock brake system (ABS) malfunction indicator lamp, see page 291 13 Trip odometer, see page 101 and 106 14 Main odometer, see page 106 4 Brake fluid low or parking brake engaged, see page 298 5 Speedometer 15 Display for program mode and gear range indicators, see page 254 6 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see combination switch on page 148 16 Malfunction/warning message memory, see page 119 7 Electronic stability program (ESP) warning lamp, system is adjusting to road conditions, see page 292 17 Outside temperature indicator, see page 101 18 Digital clock, see individual settings on page 121 8 Indicator lamp without function. It illuminates with the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It should go out when the engine is running. 19 Right turn signal indicator lamp, see combination switch on page 148 20 Fasten seat belts, see page 292 9 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp, see page 286 21 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) malfunction indicator lamp, see page 289 10 High beam headlamp indicator, see exterior lamp switch, page 143, and combination switch, see page 148 Instrument cluster Instruments and controls Operation 22 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement warning lamp, see page 290 99 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 100 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Instrument cluster Activating instrument cluster display The instrument cluster is activated by: • Opening the door1. • Pressing button (1) on the instrument cluster1. • Turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. • Switching on the exterior lamps. Instrument cluster illumination The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit daylight lighting conditions. The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted when the vehicle’s exterior lamps are switched on. 1 The instrument cluster is activated for approximately 30 seconds. Practical hints Car care Technical data 100 Display illumination, changing basic settings for driving at dusk or in darkness: Rotate adjusting knob (1) clockwise – instrument lamp intensity increases. Rotate adjusting knob (1) counterclockwise – instrument lamp intensity decreases. Note: It is not possible to select a basic brightness setting in daylight – the intensity is adjusted automatically. Index OM_203.book Seite 101 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Trip odometer (13) Outside temperature indicator (17) To reset to “0” miles/km: Warning! Activate the instrument cluster if it is not already activated, see page 100. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears if it is not displayed. See page 106. Press button (1) on the instrument cluster, see page 100. The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.). Tachometer (2) The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed. Avoid this engine speed, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Adaption to ambient temperature takes place in steps and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stopand-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of temperature change. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking. Note: The unit for the temperature indicator display can be set in the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” – “TEMP. INDICATOR” on page 121. Instrument cluster Instruments and controls Operation 101 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 102 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 102 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display P 5 4 .3 0 -4 4 5 2 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 103 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 3 Navigation system, see page 116 Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, you may use the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to call up, control and set the following systems in the multifunction display: 4 Malfunction message memory, see page 119 5 Individual settings, see page 121 6 Trip computer, see page 117 1 Trip odometer and main odometer, see page 101 and page 106 After start After reset Fuel tank content Flexible service system (FSS), see page 138 Vehicle speed, see page 106 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 137 Engine oil level indicator, see page 141 7 Telephone, see page 111 2 Audio systems, see page 108 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed. Radio, see page 108 CD player, see page 109 Cassette player, see page 110 The display advances by one system each time the button is pressed. You may call up additional displays within some of these categories by pressing the j or k button. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 103 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 104 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 104 Warning! Note: A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/ her primary focus when driving. The displays in the multifunction display can be set to German, English, French, Italian or Spanish language. See the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” – “TEXT” on page 121 for instructions on changing the language setting. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. Programming individual settings in the system can only be made while the vehicle is at standstill. The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player, cassette player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. Index OM_203.book Seite 105 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Press button: 3 è for next system 4 ÿ for previous system 5 j for next display in system 6 k for previous display in system 7 æ to increase the volume, see page 136 8 ç to decrease the volume, see page 136 9 í to dial a telephone number, see page 111 10 ì to end a call See page 111 for telephone and page 115 for instructions on answering an incoming call. 11 Horn pad Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed. P 6 8 .1 0 -2 2 3 2 -2 7 The display advances by one system each time the button is pressed. 1 Multifunction display 2 Multifunction steering wheel You may call up additional displays in some systems by pressing the j or k button. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 105 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 106 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 106 Trip and main odometer and sub menu P 5 4 .3 0 -4 4 5 3 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 107 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Press è or ÿ button repeatedly until the trip odometer and main odometer display (1) appears. 1 Trip odometer and main odometer See page 101 for instructions on resetting the trip odometer. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the required display (2, 3, 4, 5, 1) appears. 2 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 137 Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. 3 Vehicle speed if “SPEED DISP.” is selected in the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” – “SELECT DISPLAY”, refer to page 124 Outside temperature if “OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE” is selected in the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” – “SELECT DISPLAY”, see page 124 4 FSS (Flexible service system), see page 138 5 Engine oil level indicator, see page 141 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 107 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 108 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 108 Audio systems 1 Audio system is switched off. Radio 2 The radio is switched on. 3 Wave band setting and memory location number, where appropriate. 4 Station name setting or station frequency. 5 This only appears when “MEMORY” rather than “STATION SEARCH” has been selected in the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE”. See page 131. The radio must be switched on. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until display (2) appears. Press button j or k repeatedly until the required station or frequency is displayed. Use the j of k button to select a stored station or station frequency. This depends on the selection made in the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE”. See individual settings, page 131. P 5 4 .3 0 -3 6 3 4 -2 7 Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index OM_203.book Seite 109 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 CD player 1 Radio system is switched off. 2 The CD player is switched on. 3 The number of the CD currently playing is displayed if you are using a CD changer. 4 Track number. “TITLE” appears on vehicles with COMAND system. “TRACK” appears on vehicles with audio system. The radio must be switched on. The CD player must be switched on. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until display (2) appears. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the required track number (4) is displayed. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Note: P 5 4 .3 0 -3 6 3 5 -2 7 To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on the audio system or the (optional) COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 109 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 110 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Cassette player Practical hints Car care Technical data 110 1 Audio system is switched off. 2 The cassette player is switched on. 3 Side being played. The radio must be switched on. The cassette player must be switched on. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until display (2) appears. Pressing the j button fast forward on to the next track. Pressing the k button rewinds the cassette to the beginning of the current track. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Notes: P To select the reverse side of the tape, press button below track number on the audio system display, or enter 5 4 .3 0 -3 6 3 9 -2 7 request on the (optional) COMAND system located in the center dashboard. Index OM_203.book Seite 111 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Telephone 1 The telephone is switched off. Telephone book 2 The vehicle is currently outside the transmitter or receiver range. 3 The telephone is ready for use. 4 Name selected from the telephone book. 5 Number for the name selected. The dialing commences. 6 Dialing is completed. The name is displayed. The display remains for the duration of the call. 7 Duration of call 8 Memory location number 9 Signal strength (in top right corner): Vehicles with audio system: the higher the number, the stronger the signal received from the net. Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner): the higher the number of bars, the stronger the signal received from the net. P 5 4 .3 0 -3 6 4 0 -2 7 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 111 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 112 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display The telephone must be switched on. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the display (3) appears. See the separate telephone instructions manual. Pressing j or k “browses” alphabetically forward or backward through the telephone book, providing it was previously downloaded. See telephone operator’s manual for details concerning downloading. Pressing button j or k for longer than a second “browses” rapidly through the telephone book. The name selected appears in the display. Note: Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call. The procedure is cancelled and display (4) appears. Practical hints Car care Technical data 112 Press the í button when the name you require appears in the display (4). The telephone number (5) is dialed. The name will be displayed when dialing is completed. Display (6) remains for the duration of the call. Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (3) appears. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index OM_203.book Seite 113 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Redialing 1 The telephone is ready for use. 2 Number or name stored in the redial memory. 3 Number in the redial memory — redialing has commenced. 4 Dialing is completed and the name stored in the telephone book is displayed or the number dialed will remain displayed if no name has been store. The display remains for the duration of the call. 5 Signal strength: Vehicles with audio system (in top right corner): the higher the number, the stronger the signal received from the net. Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner): the higher the number of bars, the stronger the signal received from the net. 6 Memory location numbers — the 10 most recently dialed numbers are stored. L0, most recently dialed number, L1 to L9, previously dialed numbers. P 5 4 .3 0 -3 6 4 1 -2 7 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 7 Duration of call. 113 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 114 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display The telephone must be switched on. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the display (1) appears. Pressing the í button activates the redial memory and the most recently dialed number is displayed. Pressing the j or k button “browses” forward or backward through the redial memory. The number selected appears in the display. Note: Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call. The procedure is cancelled and display (1) appears. Practical hints Car care Technical data 114 Press the í button when the required number or name appears in the display (2). The telephone number (3) is dialed. Once dialing is complete the name (4) is displayed if the name is stored in the telephone book; failing that the number dialed will remain displayed. The display remains for the duration of the call. Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (1) appears. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index OM_203.book Seite 115 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Press the í button to answer the call. Incoming call Press the ì button to hang up or if you do not wish to answer the incoming call. The telephone must be switched on. 1 “CALL” — you are being called. 2 Signal strength: Vehicles with audio system (in top right corner): the higher the number, the stronger the phone signal received by the antenna. Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner): the higher the number of bars, the stronger the phone signal received by the antenna. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 115 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 116 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 116 Navigation system 1 The navigation system is switched off. 2 The navigation system is switched on but no destination has been specified. 3 The navigation system is switched on and destination guidance is active. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed. See the separate COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) operator’s manual for notes on the navigation system. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. P 5 4 .3 0 -3 6 4 3 -2 7 Index OM_203.book Seite 117 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Trip computer 1 “AFTER START” — short distance memory 2 “AFTER RESET” — long distance memory 3 Estimated range remaining 4 Distance covered “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” 5 Elapsed time “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” 6 Average speed “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” 7 Average fuel consumption “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET” Press the button è or ÿ repeatedly until the display (1, 2 or 3) appears. Press the j or k button until the “AFTER START” short distance memory (1), the “AFTER RESET” long distance memory (2) or estimated range remaining indicator (3) appears. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. P 5 4 .3 0 -4 6 4 3 -2 7 Note: The display (1) always appears the next time the trip computer is called up. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 117 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 118 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display To reset the short “AFTER START” (1) or long “AFTER RESET” distance memory (2): Call up the relevant display (1 or 2) using the j or k button and press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see page 98, until the values are reset to “0”. Practical hints Car care Technical data 118 Note: The “AFTER START” trip odometer reading is automatically reset after four hours of electronic key not being in starter switch position 1 or 2. Index OM_203.book Seite 119 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Malfunction/warning message memory 1 There are no messages stored in the system. 2 Number of messages stored in the system. 3 There are messages stored in the system. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the message memory (1 or 2) is displayed. Press the j or k button if display (2) appears. The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See page 293 for malfunction and warning messages. Display (2) will reappear after you have scanned all the malfunction and warning messages. Should any malfunction or warning messages be stored while driving, they will reappear in the display (2) when the electronic key is in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch. The malfunction or warning messages will now be displayed for approximately 5 seconds each. Pressing the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 98) displays the malfunction and warning messages once more. P 5 4 .3 0 -4 6 4 4 -2 7 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 119 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 120 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display The message memory will be cleared when the electronic key is turned in the starter switch to position 1 or 2. Should any subsequent faults occur, they will be displayed in the message memory. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Practical hints Car care Technical data 120 Important! Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and displayed to a low level of detail. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages. See page 293, for malfunction and warning messages. Index OM_203.book Seite 121 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Individual settings 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings. 2 “SETTINGS” – the requested menu can be called up in this options menu: “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”, see page 124. “LIGHTING”, see page 128. “VEHICLE”, see page 131. “CONVENIENCE”, see page 134. The four menus contain additional submenus. Individual settings can be selected in these submenus. 3 See below for instructions on returning the setting menus to the factory settings. 4 Acknowledgment. Note: The displayed menu “SETTINGS” depends on the equipment of the vehicle. P 5 4 .3 0 -4 4 5 4 -2 7 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 121 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 122 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker in the setting menu. “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”, see page 124. “LIGHTING”, see page 128. “VEHICLE”, see page 131. “CONVENIENCE”, see page 134 Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Practical hints Car care Technical data 122 Note: These settings may only be performed with the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2. Index OM_203.book Seite 123 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 To return menu “SETTINGS” (2) to its factory setting: Note: For safety reasons, the individual setting “LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” in menu “LIGHTING” cannot be reset while driving, see page 130. If an attempt is made, the message “LIGHTING” – “CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING” will be displayed. • Call up the individual setting preliminary display (1) or display (2). • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 98) for approximately 3 seconds. Display (3) will appear. • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once more. The menu “SETTINGS” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (4). The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear if you do not press the reset knob on the instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 123 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 124 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 124 “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” P 5 4 .3 0 -4 4 5 5 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 125 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 9 “SELECT DISPLAY” – The selection “SPEED DISP.” respectively “OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE” is permanently displayed in the multifunction display. “SPEED DISP.” can be used to display, for instance, the present speed in km/h if the setting menu (7) “DISPLAY VALUES IN” is set to indicate km. 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 2 “SETTINGS” – the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” can be called up in this options menu. Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. 10 See page 127 for instructions on returning the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” to the factory setting. 3 “SET TIME HOURS:” 4 “SET TIME MINUTES:”1 5 “12/24 O’CLOCK” – the unit set is displayed in the instrument cluster display 11 Acknowledgment. Note: 6 “TEMP. INDICATOR” – the unit set is displayed in the outside temperature display, in the instrument cluster and in the automatic air conditioner display. Vehicles with COMAND: For setting clock and speedometer units, see separate COMAND operator’s manual. 7 “DISPLAY VALUES IN” – the unit set is displayed in the multifunction display (except speedometer). 8 “TEXT” – sets the language used in the multifunction display 1 Only vehicles without COMAND. Vehicles with COMAND, see separate operator’s manual. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 125 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 126 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data 126 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. Press the j or k button until the required display (3 to 9) is displayed. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button sets the time in setting menus (3, 4) and controls the selection marker in the setting menus (5 to 9). Press button æ or ç until the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” is selected by the selection marker. The settings made are stored and applied immediately. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index OM_203.book Seite 127 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 To return menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” (5 to 9) to its factory setting: • Call up one of the setting menus(3 to 9). • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see page 98, for approximately 3 seconds. Display (10) will appear. • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once more. The individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (11). The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will appear if you do not press the reset knob on the instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 127 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 128 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 128 “LIGHTING” P 5 4 .3 0 -4 4 5 6 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 129 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up the individual setting menu “LIGHTING”. Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. Press button æ or ç until the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” is selected by the selection marker. 3 “LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE”1, 2, see page 144. Press the j or k button until the required display (3 to 6) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker. The settings made are stored and applied immediately. 4 “LOCATOR LIGHTING”, see page 147. 5 “HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF”, see “Night security illumination” on page 146. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. 6 “INT. ILLUMINATION DELAYED SWITCH-OFF”, see “Interior lighting” on page 203. 7 Returning the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” to the factory setting. 8 Acknowledgment. 1 Except Canada 2 For safety reasons, setting only possible while vehicle is standing still. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 129 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 130 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display To return menu “LIGHTING” (3 to 6) to its factory setting: • Call up menu (3 to 6). • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 98) in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. Display (7) will appear. • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once more. The individual setting menu “LIGHTING” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (8). The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will appear if you do not press the reset knob on the instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Practical hints Car care Technical data 130 Note: For safety reasons, the individual setting “LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” in menu “LIGHTING” cannot be reset while driving. If an attempt is made, the message “LIGHTING” – “CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING” will be displayed. Index OM_203.book Seite 131 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 “VEHICLE” (audio and central locking system) P 5 4 .3 0 -4 4 5 7 -2 9 Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 131 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 132 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up the individual setting menu “VEHICLE”. Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. 3 “PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE” – radio adjustment “STATION SEARCH”: use the j or k button to select a frequency. – radio adjustment “MEMORY”: use the j or k button to select a stored station (preset memory). 4 “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”, see automatic central locking on page 40. 5 Returning the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” to the factory setting. 6 Acknowledgment. Practical hints Car care Technical data 132 Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. Press button æ or ç until the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” is selected by the selection marker. Press the j or k button until the required display (3 to 4) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker. The settings made are stored and applied immediately. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. Index OM_203.book Seite 133 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 To return menu “VEHICLE” (3 and 4) to its factory setting: • Call up menu (3 or 4). • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 98) in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. Display (5) will appear. • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once more. The individual setting menu “VEHICLE” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (6). The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will appear if you do not press the knob for instrument cluster illumination within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 133 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 134 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 134 “CONVENIENCE” (vehicles with memory function) P 5 4 .3 0 -4 4 5 8 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 135 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Press button æ or ç until the individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” is selected by the selection marker. 1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up the individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE”. Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel controls the selection marker. 3 “EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE”, see page 48. Press the j or k button until the required display (3 to 5) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection marker. The settings made are stored and applied immediately. 4 “SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT” if setting “ON” is selected, all settings selected in the individual setting can be stored key-dependent in memory. Memory function, see page 95. The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system. 5 “MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING” – the passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and programmed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers, see page 92. 6 Returning the individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” to the factory setting. 7 Acknowledgment. Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appears. Press the j or k button until the setting menu “SETTINGS” (2) is displayed. Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display Instruments and controls Operation Driving 135 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 136 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display To return menu “CONVENIENCE” (3 to 5) to its factory setting: • Call up menu (3 to 5). • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see page 98, in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. Display (6) will appear. • Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once more. The individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged by display (7). The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will appear if you do not press the reset knob on the instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be reset. Practical hints Car care Technical data 136 Setting the audio volume You can only adjust the volume of the system currently in use. Vehicles with COMAND system: The volume setting for each system (audio, telephone, navigation and voice recognition system) is stored separately. Setting button: æ increases the volume. ç reduces the volume. Index OM_203.book Seite 137 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Coolant temperature gauge During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120°C. The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 120°C. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Warning! • Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. • Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel. See page 106. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down. Press button j or k until the coolant temperature gauge appears. Note: Coolant temperature gauge Instruments and controls Operation Excessive coolant temperatures trigger a warning in the multifunction display. See page 302. 137 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 138 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Flexible service system Flexible service system (FSS) (service indicator) Practical hints Car care Technical data 138 The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2, or while driving when reaching the service warning threshold. The symbols and messages indicate the type of service to be performed: 9 Service A ½ Service B One of the following messages will appear in the display (e.g. Service A): The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is directly related to the operating conditions of the vehicle. The symbol 9 or ½ appears together with a message in the multifunction indicator prior to the next suggested service. Depending on operating conditions throughout the year, the next service is calculated and displayed in days or distance remaining. “SERVICE A – IN xx DAYS” “SERVICE A – IN xx MILES” (Canada: KM) “SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS” “SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx MILES” (Canada: KM) “SERVICE A – DUE NOW” The next service due date is displayed either in days or in miles, depending on your driving style. Once the suggested service term has passed, the symbol and message appear for approximately 30 seconds and a signal sounds every time when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. Index OM_203.book Seite 139 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Note: The service indicator disappears automatically after 30 seconds or if the knob for instrument cluster illumination, see page 98, in the instrument cluster is pressed. When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such days not counted by the FSS can be added by your Mercedes-Benz Center. Calling up service indicator manually: The interval between services is determined by the type of driving for which the vehicle is used. For example, driving at extreme speeds, and cold starts combined with short distance driving in which the engine does not reach operating normal temperature, reduce the interval between services. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 106. Press button j or k until the FSS indicator appears. The next or previous system is displayed by pressing button è or ÿ. Important! The FSS indicator is not an engine oil level indicator. See page 141 for engine oil level indicator. Flexible service system Instruments and controls Operation 139 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 140 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Flexible service system Practical hints Car care Technical data 140 Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-Benz Center sets the counter mileage to 10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km). The multifunction display will show the question: “DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? – CONFIRM BY PRESSING R” The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so: Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster again for approximately 4 seconds to reset the service indicator until a signal sounds. To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 106. The new service indicator is displayed with the reset distance of 10 000 miles (Canada 15 000 km). Press button j or k until the FSS indicator appears. If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see page 98, for approximately 4 seconds. However you choose to set your reference numbers, the scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet must be followed to properly care for your vehicle. Index OM_203.book Seite 141 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 • with engine not at operational temperature up to approximately 30 minutes. Engine oil level indicator The engine oil level check can be repeated after a short time. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 106. With the multifunction display showing the trip odometer and main odometer, press button j or k on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the “MEASUREMENT CORRECT ONLY IF VEH. P 5 4 . 3 0 - 4 4 6 1 - 2 6LEVEL” engine oil level indicator appears. This indicator is only a reminder. Measurement can be cancelled by To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level pressing button j or k if the vehicle is not ground, with engine at normal operational temperature. parked on level ground. An incorrect reading will be recorded if you do not cancel the measurement. Move Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping the vehicle to level ground and measure again. the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan. The electronic key in starter switch is not in position 2 if The message “OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD” will be the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – SWITCH ON IGNITION!” displayed if the required waiting period has not been message appears. observed after stopping the engine: The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – MEASURING NOW!” • with engine at operational temperature message is displayed after approximately 3 seconds. approximately 5 minutes. Engine oil level indicator Instruments and controls Operation 141 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 142 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine oil level indicator One of the following messages will subsequently appear on the indicator: “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – O.K.” No oil needs to be added. “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.0 QUART” (Canada: 1.0 L) “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.5 QUART” (Canada: 1.5 L) “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 2.0 QUART” (Canada: 2.0 L) See “Adding engine oil level”, on page 321 for instructions on adding engine oil. “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – REDUCE OIL LEVEL” Do not overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Practical hints Car care Technical data 142 The “MEASURING NOT POSSIBLE” message will be displayed if a proper oil level check cannot be performed. The engine oil level check can be repeated after a short while. Notes: See malfunction and warning messages on page 293 and page 303 if an engine oil level indicator appears on the multifunction display when the engine is running. The engine oil level cannot be checked while the engine is running. The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – NOT WHEN ENGINE ON” message will appear. Engine oil consumption Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the break-in period. During the break-in period, higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal. Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in increased consumption. Index OM_203.book Seite 143 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) Exterior lamp switch ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops) ‡ Front fog lamps (pull out one stop) with parking lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Green indicator in lamp switch comes on. † Rear fog lamp (pull out to second detent) in addition to the front fog lamps. Yellow indicator in lamp switch comes on. Note: With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing lamps) are not switched off. Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation. M Off U Automatic headlamp mode, see below. C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps, licence plate lamps, instrument panel lamps) Canada only: When the engine is running, the low beam is additionally switched on. Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the exterior lamp switch is turned to position M or U. B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam headlamps (combination switch pushed forward). Exterior lamp switch Instruments and controls Operation 143 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 144 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamp switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 144 Headlamp mode Automatic headlamp mode Manual headlamp mode Turn exterior lamp switch to position U. The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp switch, see above. • Electronic key in starter switch position 1: Note: • Electronic key in starter switch position 2 and the engine running: With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, the low beam headlamps can not be switched off manually. Warning! The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. Switch on the vehicle lights by hand when driving or traffic conditions require you to do so. The parking lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. The low beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can still be switched on and off manually using the exterior lamp switch. Note: With the daytime running lamp mode activated, the low beam headlamps can not be switched off manually. The headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions. Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can not be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To activate the fog lamps turn exterior switch to position B. Index OM_203.book Seite 145 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Daytime running lamp mode • USA only: The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior lamp switch in position M. Turn exterior lamp switch to position M or U. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on. In low ambient light conditions the parking lamps will also switch on. To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” on page 128. • Canada only: When shifting from a driving position to position “N” or “P”, the low beam switches off (3 minutes delay). Note: See page 143 for notes on the exterior lamp switch. For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should be turned to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. Exterior lamp switch Instruments and controls Operation 145 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 146 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamp switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 146 Night security illumination Notes: At low ambient light conditions and with the engine having been switched off, the exterior lamps (fog lamps and parking lamps) switch on for added illumination, (except in daytime running mode). After the last door has been closed the lamp-on time period commences. Within 10 minutes after closing the last door the night security illumination can be reactivated by opening a door. See the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH–OFF” on page 128, for instructions on how to activate the function. The lamp-on time period for night security illumination can be set at several different timed levels from 0 (off) to 60 seconds, see the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH–OFF” on page 128. If after switching the engine off, no doors are opened or if after opening the doors they are not closed, the night security illumination will switch off automatically after 60 seconds. Deactivating night security illumination temporarily: Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 0 then to position 2 and back to position 0 again before getting out of the vehicle. The night security illumination will not be activated when the door is opened. Index OM_203.book Seite 147 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Headlamp cleaning system Locator lighting After unlocking the vehicle with the electronic key during darkness the fog lamps and parking lamps switch for approximately 40 seconds. The exterior lamps will be switched off when opening the driver’s door. See the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “LOCATOR LIGHTING” on page 128, for instructions on how to activate the function. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1. The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-pressure water jet when you press the headlamp washer button (1). See page 323 for instructions on filling up the windshield/headlamp washer reservoir. Exterior lamp switch Instruments and controls Operation 147 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 148 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Combination switch Combination switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 148 To signal minor directional changes, such as changing lanes on a highway, move combination switch briefly to the point of resistance only and release. The turn signals blink three times. To operate the turn signals continuously, move the combination switch past the point of resistance (up or down). The switch is automatically canceled when the steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree. Turn signal failure If one of the turn signals fails, the turn signal indicator system flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate. 1 Low beam (exterior lamp switch position B) 2 High beam (exterior lamp switch position B) 3 High beam flasher (high beam available independent of exterior lamp switch position) 4 Turn signals, right 5 Turn signals, left Index OM_203.book Seite 149 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 I Intermittent wiping Vehicles with optional rain sensor: One initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by a rain sensor monitoring the wetness of the windshield. This will not occur with a front door open. Notes: With switch in this position, one wipe occurs when turning the electronic key in starter switch from position 0. However, this might cause scratches on a dry windshield. Turn combination switch to Off position before turning the electronic key in starter switch from position 0. 6 Press switch briefly: Single wipe without washer fluid (select only if windshield is wet). Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in presence of water spray at windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result. Push switch past resistance point: Windshield washer system, windshield wipers. See page 323 for instructions on filling the windshield washer reservoir. II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed 7 Windshield wipers Vehicles without optional rain sensor: If the vehicle is standing still, the wiper will switch back one setting. 0 Off Combination switch Instruments and controls Operation 149 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 150 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Combination switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 150 Blocked windshield wipers Windshield wipers smear If the windshield wipers become blocked (for example, due to snow), switch off the wipers. For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove electronic key from starter switch. Remove blockage. If the windshield wipers smear the windshield, even during rain, activate the washer system as often as necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be mixed in the correct ratio. Activate combination switch again (electronic key in starter switch position 1). See page 323 for instructions on filling up the windshield washer reservoir. Emergency operation of windshield wipers In case of windshield wiper malfunction in switch positions I or III, turn combination switch to wiper setting II. Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. See page 362 for instructions on replacing wiper blade inserts. Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing: MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water. 1 part “S” to 100 parts water (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water). For temperature below freezing: MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent). Index OM_203.book Seite 151 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Hazard warning flasher switch To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once. To deactivate, press switch again. If hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press switch twice to deactivate. Note: With the hazard warning flasher activated, the combination switch in position for either left or right turn, and the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2, only the respective left or right side turn signals will operate. The hazard warning flasher can be activated either manually via the switch located in the dashboard, or it is activated automatically at the time an airbag is deployed. Hazard warning flasher Instruments and controls Operation 151 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 152 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Climate control Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 152 Climate control (model C 240) P 6 8 .1 0 -2 1 6 4 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 153 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 1 Display and controls 6 Air volume control for right center air outlet 2 Air volume control for left center air outlet 7 Air volume control and air outlet on dashboard top center 3 Center air outlet, left, adjustable 8 Air volume control for side air outlet 4 Thumbwheel for adding outside air at air outlets for center, left and right sides, as well as dashboard top center and rear passenger compartment 9 Side air outlet, adjustable 10 Side defroster outlet, fixed 5 Center air outlet, right, adjustable Climate control Instruments and controls 153 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 154 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data 154 Display and controls 5 Rear window defroster, see page 170 6 Economy mode, see page 159 Residual engine heat utilization, see page 159 7 Air distribution and air volume (automatic) 8 Air recirculation, see page 167 9 Defrosting, see page 157 Important! P 1 Air volume 2 Temperature control, left 3 Temperature control, right 4 Air distribution control switch This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioning system that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a 8 3 . 3 0 - 3 4 2 5 - 2 6qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected in a recovery system for recycling. Index OM_203.book Seite 155 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Climate control Notes: The system is always at operational readiness, except when manually switched off. Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. The climate control only operates with the engine running. Also keep the air intake grill in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. The temperature selector should be left at the desired temperature setting. The temperature selected is reached as quickly as possible. The storage compartment between the front seats can be ventilated. See page 171 for notes on ventilating the storage space under the armrest in the center console. The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a higher or lower temperature. The air conditioner switches itself off for its own protection if refrigerant is lost. No cooling will then take place. Economy mode S cannot be switched off. Have the air conditioner checked by a Mercedes-Benz Center should this happen. The desired interior temperature can be selected separately for the left and right side of the passenger compartment. Adjust the temperature settings in small increments. If the vehicle interior has been heated by direct sunlight and is very hot, ventilate the interior (open door or windows for a short period) before driving off. The climate control removes considerable moisture from the air during operation in the cooling mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground through ducts in the underbody. Dust filter The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the economy mode S is selected, see page 159. Climate control Instruments and controls Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. 155 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 156 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Climate control Basic setting – automatic mode In the automatic mode the climate control cools or heats the interior depending on outside temperature and the selected interior temperature. With the automatic mode switched off, the air volume and distribution can still be set manually. Press U button. Air volume and distribution are controlled automatically. We recommend to set the left and right temperature to 72°F (22°C). Please make changes from this setting to suit your personal requirements. Heating mode: To lower headroom temperature, use thumbwheel (4, page 152). Air conditioning mode: Open air outlets at dashboard top center (7, page 152) for an even air distribution. Practical hints Car care Technical data 156 Special settings (use only for short duration) Air distribution and air volume, manual Press U button. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Select any of the six air volume speeds and the air distribution. Air distribution, manual: The air distribution for the right and left side operate together. h Air from the center, side, dashboard top center and rear passenger compartment air outlets. j Air from the windshield, side defroster and rear passenger compartment air outlets. k Air from the center, side, footwell, rear footwell and rear passenger compartment air outlets. To return to automatic mode: Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Index OM_203.book Seite 157 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Defrosting Windows fogged up on the inside Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Switch off the economy mode, if selected. Press button S. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Switch off air recirculation, if selected. Press button O, the indicator lamp in the button will go out. Switch off air recirculation, if selected. Press button O. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Close center air outlets. Set blower to the maximum blower speed. Turn wheels (8, page 152) up to open left and right side air outlets (9, page 152). Adjust side air outlets upward. Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Pressing the switch again returns the system to the previous setting. Increase temperature setting. Open the side air outlets (9, page 152) and direct them onto the side windows. Windshield fogged up on the outside Switch on the windshield wiper. Close air outlet at dashboard top center (7, page 152). Switch to manual mode. Turn air distribution control switch to position h or k. Climate control Instruments and controls 157 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 158 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Climate control Air recirculation Select air recirculation: The indicator lamp in the O button is not illuminated. Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. To switch off the air recirculation: The indicator lamp in the O button is illuminated. Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Switching on air recirculation and activating convenience closing of power windows and sliding/ pop-up roof: Practical hints Car care Technical data 158 Switching off air recirculation and activating convenience opening: The indicator lamp in the O button is illuminated. Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the position they were in before closing. A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually after convenience closing will no longer be returned to the position it was in before closing when convenience opening is selected. The system automatically switches from air recirculation to fresh air: • after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above about 40°F (5°C), The indicator lamp in the O button is not illuminated. • after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below about 40°F (5°C), Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. • after 5 minutes if economy mode S is selected. The system switches automatically to air recirculation at high outside temperatures. A quantity of outside air is added after a maximum of 30 minutes. If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch from recirculated air back to fresh air. Index OM_203.book Seite 159 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Economy mode Residual engine heat utilization The function of this setting corresponds to the automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not possible to air condition in this setting. With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for a short while, dependent of the temperature setting of the automatic climate control. Air volume and distribution are controlled automatically. Press S button to activate. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. To select: Press S button once again to return to the previous setting. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it altogether. Press button T. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Important! In the S mode the windows could fog up on the inside. Switch off S mode. This function selection will not activate if the battery level is insufficient. The function switches off automatically: Climate control - OFF/ON To switch the climate control off, set the air volume control switch to position 0. • if the electronic key in starter switch is turned to position 2, The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off. • after approximately 30 minutes, While driving, use this setting only temporarily, otherwise the windshield could fog up. • if the battery voltage drops. To switch the climate control on again, set air volume control switch to any speed. Climate control Instruments and controls 159 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 160 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 160 Automatic climate control (optional on model C 240) P 8 3 .2 0 -2 1 4 4 -2 9 OM_203.book Seite 161 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 1 Display and controls 6 Air volume control for right center air outlet 2 Air volume control for left center air outlet 7 Air volume control and air outlet on dashboard top center 3 Center air outlet, left, adjustable 8 Air volume control for side air outlet 4 Thumbwheel for adding outside air at air outlets for center, left and right sides, as well as dashboard top center and rear passenger compartment 9 Side air outlet, adjustable 10 Side defroster outlet, fixed 5 Center air outlet, right, adjustable Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 161 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 162 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data 162 7 Temperature control, right, raising Display and controls 8 Temperature control, right, lowering 9 Rear window defroster, see page 170 10 Economy mode, see page 169 Residual engine heat utilization, see page 169 11 Air volume control + switch on system 12 Air volume control switch off system 13 Air recirculation, see page 167 14 Defrosting, see page 166 P 8 3 .4 0 -2 2 6 5 -2 6 1 Temperature control, left, lowering Important! 2 Temperature control, left, raising This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioning system that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected in a recovery system for recycling. 3 Air distribution control switch left (automatic, manual operation) 4 Activated charcoal filter, see page 168 5 Display 6 Air distribution control switch right (automatic, manual operation) Index OM_203.book Seite 163 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Automatic climate control The system is always at operational readiness, except when manually switched off. The automatic climate control only operates with the engine running. The temperature selector should be left at the desired temperature setting. The temperature selected is reached as quickly as possible. 1 Temperature, left The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a higher or lower temperature. 2 Temperature, right 3 Air volume The desired interior temperature and air distribution can be selected separately for the left and right side of the passenger compartment. Make the temperature settings in small increments. 4 Automatic mode is selected The automatic climate control removes considerable moisture from the air during operation in the cooling mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground through ducts in the underbody. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the economy mode S is selected, see page 169. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 163 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 164 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data 164 Notes: Basic setting – automatic mode Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. In the automatic mode the automatic climate control cools or heats the interior depending on the direction and strength of the sunlight, outside temperature and the selected interior temperature of the vehicle. With the automatic mode switched off, the air volume and distribution can still be set manually. Also keep the air intake grill in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. The storage compartment between the front seats can be ventilated. See page 171 for notes on ventilating the storage space under the armrest in the center console. The air conditioner switches itself off for its own protection if refrigerant is lost. No cooling will then take place. Economy mode S cannot be switched off. Have the air conditioner checked by a Mercedes-Benz Center should this happen. If the vehicle interior has been heated by direct sunlight and is very hot, ventilate the interior (open door or windows for a short period) before driving off. Dust filter Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. Briefly press left or right U button. The h, j and k symbols will no longer be visible. The economy mode and air recirculation functions will be switched off. The automatic blower will be activated at the same time. We recommend to set the temperature switches on the left and right to 72°F (22°C). Please make changes from this setting to suit your personal requirements. Heating mode: To lower headroom temperature, use thumbwheel (4, page 160). Air conditioning mode: Open air outlets at dashboard top center (7, page 160) for an even air distribution. Index OM_203.book Seite 165 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Special settings (use only for short duration) Air volume, manual Seven blower speeds are available. Air distribution, manual Press right Q or left M side of air volume control switch until the requested blower speed is attained. Press left or right U button. The button pops out, the h, j and k symbols are visible. Turn the button to select the air distribution desired. The display “AUTO” disappears and the automatic mode is switched off. The selected blower speed is shown in the display. h Air from the center, side, dashboard top center and rear passenger compartment air outlets. j Air from the windshield, side defroster and rear passenger compartment air outlets. To return to automatic mode: Press left or right U button until it clicks in. The h, j and k symbols will no longer be visible. k Air from the center, side, footwell, rear footwell and rear passenger compartment air outlets. To return to automatic mode: Press left or right U button. The h, j and k symbols will no longer be visible. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 165 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 166 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Practical hints Car care Technical data 166 Defrosting Windows fogged up on the inside Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Switch off the economy mode, if selected: Press button S. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Maximum heated and automatically controlled amount of air is directed to the defroster and windshield air outlets. Switch off air recirculation, if selected: Press button O. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. The fan is set to a higher speed and the warm air is directed to the defroster and windshield air outlets. Pressing the P button again returns the system to the previous setting. Switch off air recirculation, if selected: Press button O. The indicator lamp in the button will go out. Set blower to the maximum blower speed. Increase temperature setting. Open the side air outlets and direct them onto the side windows. Windshield fogged up on the outside Switch on the windshield wiper. Close air outlet at dashboard top center (7, page 160). Switch to manual mode. Turn air distribution control switch to position h or k. Index OM_203.book Seite 167 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Air recirculation Switching off air recirculation and activating convenience opening: Select air recirculation: The indicator lamp in the button O is illuminated. The indicator lamp in the button O is not illuminated. Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the position they were in before closing. Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually after convenience closing will no longer be returned to the position it was in before closing when convenience opening is selected. To switch off the air recirculation: The indicator lamp in the button O is illuminated. Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The system automatically switches from air recirculation to fresh air: Switching on air recirculation and activating convenience closing of power windows and sliding/ pop-up roof: • after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above about 40°F (5°C), The indicator lamp in the button O is not illuminated. • after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below about 40°F (5°C), Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. • after 5 minutes if economy mode S is selected. The system switches automatically to air recirculation at high outside temperatures. A quantity of outside air is added after a maximum of 30 minutes. If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch from recirculated air back to fresh air. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 167 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 168 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Activated charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compartment. Select activated charcoal filter: The indicator lamp in the button e is not illuminated. Press e button briefly. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Practical hints Car care Technical data 168 The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down. Switching on the activated charcoal filter and activating convenience closing of power windows and sliding/ pop-up roof: The indicator lamp in the e button is not illuminated. The indicator lamp in the button e is illuminated. Press button e for more than 2 seconds, the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. Press e button briefly. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Switching off activated charcoal filter and activating convenience opening: Switch off activated charcoal filter: The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode, if the carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxides (NOX) concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level. The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if economy mode S is selected or if the outside temperature has fallen below 40°F (5°C). The indicator lamp in the e button is illuminated. Press button e for more than 2 seconds, the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the position they were in before closing. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually after convenience closing will no longer be returned to the position it was in before closing when convenience opening is selected. Index OM_203.book Seite 169 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Economy mode To switch the automatic climate control on again, press the U or P button, or set air volume control switch to any speed. The function of this setting corresponds to the automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not possible to air condition in this setting. Residual engine heat utilization Press S button to activate. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for a short while, dependent of the temperature set in the automatic climate control. Air volume and distribution are controlled automatically. Press S button once again to return to the previous setting. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Important! To select: In the S mode the windows could fog up on the inside. Switch off S mode. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it altogether. Automatic climate control - OFF/ON Press button T. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. To switch the automatic climate control off, set the air volume control switch to position 0. This function selection will not activate if the battery level is insufficient. The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off. The function switches off automatically: • if the electronic key in starter switch is turned to position 2, While driving, use this setting only temporarily, otherwise the windshield could fog up. • after approximately 30 minutes, • if the battery voltage drops. Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 169 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 170 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Rear window defroster Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. To select: Press the F button in the control panel of the automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the button illuminates. To cancel: Press the F button in the control panel of the automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Note: Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed before activating the defroster. Practical hints Car care Technical data 170 The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically turned off after approximately 6–17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature and vehicle speed. If several power consumers are turned on simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged, it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside the switch starts blinking. As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the defroster automatically turns itself back on. Index OM_203.book Seite 171 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Front center console storage compartment ventilation The air volume is dependent on the setting of: • air distribution control, • air volume control, • air outlets in the dashboard. The air temperature is about the same as that of the dashboard air outlets. It cannot be regulated separately. Notes: The compartment can get very warm due to its confined space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air outlet while heating the passenger compartment. Do not allow articles to obstruct the air outlet in the storage compartment. The front center console compartment has its own air outlet. To open: Raise lever (1). To close: Lower lever (1). Automatic climate control Instruments and controls Operation 171 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 172 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic climate control Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets Practical hints Car care Technical data 172 1 Center air outlet, left 2 Air volume control for center air outlets To open: Turn the wheel upward. 3 Center air outlet, right Note: The temperature at the air outlets for the rear passenger compartment (1 and 3) is the same as at the dashboard center air outlets. Index OM_203.book Seite 173 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Audio and telephone operation Operating safety These instructions are intended to help you become acquainted with your Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions. Warning! Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions. The radio, cassette deck, CD changer1 and telephone1 are interconnected. Therefore, when one of the components is defective or has not been removed/replaced properly this may impair the function of other components. Warning! In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, system settings should be entered with the vehicle at standstill and systems should be operated by the driver only when traffic conditions permit. Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving. These malfunctions might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. We recommend that you have any service work or alterations to electronic components done at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 50 feet (approximately14 m) every second. 1 Optional equipment Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Audio system Instruments and controls 173 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 174 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 174 Operating and display elements 1 On/off, volume, see page 176 4 Radio mode selector, see page 179 2 Telephone mode selector, see page 190 5 Manual tuning, see page 180 and 180 Fast Forward/Reverse (tape), see page 184 Fast Forward/Reverse (CD), see page 189 Telephone book, see page 191 3 Seek tuning, see page 180, Track search (tape), see page 184, Skipping tracks (CD), see page 188 Manual repeat dialing (telephone), see page 193 6 CD mode selector, see page 188 7 Tape mode selector, see page 182 Index OM_203.book Seite 175 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 8 Display panel The cassette slot is located behind the display panel. For notes on playing cassettes, see page 182 10 Scan tuning (Radio, see page 180) Tape track search, see page 184 CD, see page 180 9 Alpha-numeric keypad for station storage and frequency entry, see page 182 optional telephone, see page 190 Tape eject, see page 183 Tape track select, see page 184 Dolby, see page 185 CD track access, see page 190 11 Function button, see page 182 and 190 Audio system Instruments and controls 12 Soft keys for radio band selection, see page 179 tone controls, see page 177 scan, see page 180 13 Tape eject, see page 182 175 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 176 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Button and soft key operation In these instructions, the alpha-numeric keypad (right side of radio face) and the function buttons (left side of the radio face) are referred to as “buttons” and the four keys under the display are referred to as “soft keys” Note: Do not press directly on the radio display face. Practical hints Car care Technical data 176 Operation Switching on and off Press the control knob . The system is switched off when the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed. The radio is switched on again when the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 2. Note: The system can also be switched on separately with the electronic key removed, but will switch itself off automatically after half an hour to conserve vehicle battery power. Index OM_203.book Seite 177 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Bass Adjusting the volume Press the “AUD” key repeatedly until “BASS” appears on the display. Turning the control knob clockwise will increase the volume, counterclockwise will decrease the volume. Note: Press the “+” key to increase or the “-” key to decrease the level. The volume setting can be selected separately for the telephone, audio system and voice recognition system. Pressing the “+” and “-” keys simultaneously resets the Bass to its center (flat) level. Audio functions Treble The “AUD” key is used to select the BASS, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE functions. Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the radio, cassette and CD modes. Tone level settings are identified by the vertical bars. The center (flat) setting is shown by one longer bar in the center of the display. Press the “AUD” key repeatedly until “TREBLE” appears on the display. Press the “+” key to increase or the “-” key to decrease the level. Pressing the “+” and “-” keys simultaneously resets the Treble to its center (flat) level. Audio system Instruments and controls 177 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 178 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 178 Fader Centering all audio functions Press the “AUD” key repeatedly until “FADER” appears on the display. Press the “R” key to move the sound to the rear speakers or the “F” key to move the sound to the front speakers. Push and hold down the “AUD” key. All audio functions (bass, treble, balance and fader) are set to center or flat positions, and the volume is adjusted to a preset level. “RESET” appears on the display. Pressing the “F” and “R” keys simultaneously resets the Fader to its center level. Balance Press the “AUD” key repeatedly until “BALANCE” appears on the display. Press the “L” key to move the sound to the left speakers or the “R” key to move the sound to the right speakers. Pressing the “L” and “R” keys simultaneously resets the Balance to its center level. Index OM_203.book Seite 179 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Audio system tone level selection Radio mode To select the tone level settings for radio, cassette, and CD operation press the key “AUD”. The tone level settings menu is now displayed. Press key “EXT”, and “SOUND” appears on the display. Selecting radio mode Press button. Selecting the band Press the key located below the desired band. The band selected is shown in the top line of the display. Press the key “DRV” to adjust the sound to the “Driver” and co-driver position. The key “SP” is for “Speech”, optimizing the sound for spoken language. Frequency ranges: The key “AMB” offers “Ambience” , a three-dimensional sound. The key “OFF” switches off the tone level setting selection. Audio system Instruments and controls FM 87.9 -107.9 MHz AM 530 -1710 kHz WB approx.162 MHz 179 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 180 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 180 Seek tuning Manual tuning Press either the or button. Step-by-step station tuning in ascending or descending order of frequency will take place. The first three tuning steps will take place without muting. The radio will then be muted and high-speed tuning will take place until the button is released. The following tuning intervals will be shown on the display: FM 200 kHz AM 10 kHz WB Channels 1-7 Press either the or button. The radio will tune to the next receivable station. Scan tuning # Press the S C button. Each strongly receivable station on the band selected will be tuned in for 8 seconds. The first scan will tune only the stations with a high signal strength. The second scan will tune every receivable station. By pressing either the # , , , buttons or the S C button the scan mode can be cancelled. Index OM_203.book Seite 181 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Storing stations automatically (Autostore) Weather Band Press the “AS” key until the word “SEARCH” is displayed. The ten strongest stations are stored automatically, with having the strongest signal. Press the “WB” key. The last weather band station is tuned in. Use buttons - P 7Q R toS select a different station. If the station cannot be received, the next available station is selected automatically. Press button or . The next available station is tuned in. The message “WB NONE” appears if no station can be received. If less than 10 stations are available within receiving range, only those will be stored. Station memory Pressing a station selection button without a stored station will not display a frequency for approximately 2 seconds. Thereafter the station selected last will be displayed. Ten stations each in the AM and FM bands can be stored via the alpha-numeric keypad. The 0 button corresponds to location 10. Weatherband (WB) channels 1 to 7 are preset at the factory and can be retrieved via the alpha-numeric keypad, but cannot be changed. O P R Note: Autostore memory is in addition to the regular station memory. Previously stored stations are not erased. Briefly press “AS” to leave the Autostore and return to manual presets. Press “AS” again to call up Autostore. Audio system Instruments and controls 181 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 182 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 182 Cassette mode Storing stations 0 Hold the desired number button down for approximately 2 seconds. The currently displayed frequency is stored on the selected station button. The storage procedure is confirmed by a short signal tone. O P R Retrieving a station from memory Press the desired station button - 0 O P R . Direct frequency input (AM and FM only) Select the band. Press the “ button and enter the desired frequency using the alpha-numeric keypad 0 . Frequencies outside of the frequency ranges (frequencies specified on page 179) will not be accepted. The frequency input mode is cancelled if no button is pressed within 4 seconds. Playing cassettes E Press the T A Pbutton. When the E J button is pressed, the display folds down and the cassette slot becomes visible. Push the cassette gently into the slot until it engages. The cassette will be pulled in automatically. Note: Do not press directly on the display face. Return the display panel to its normal position by folding it back up and pressing gently on the display frame to lock in place. Important! O P R If the display is in the down position for more than 20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will continue at 5 second intervals until the display is returned to its normal position. Index OM_203.book Seite 183 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Cassette eject The system will switch to cassette mode. Track 1 will be played and “SIDE 1” displayed. Track 1 is the side of the cassette which is facing upwards. The cassette deck will automatically detect the type of tape and switch the equalization automatically. A cassette symbol on the display indicates that a tape is in the mechanism. This symbol appears in all modes except cassette mode. Press the E J button. The display will fold down and the cassette will be ejected. Remove the cassette, then fold the display back up manually. The system will switch back to radio mode automatically. Notes: The cassette will not be ejected when the system is switched off. If a cassette is not ejected, continue to hold the E J button for at least 5 seconds to eject the cassette. The cassette will not be ejected when the system is switched off or another mode is selected. If a cassette is in the mechanism, cassette mode can be E selected by using the T A Pbutton. Important! If the display is in the down position for more than 20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will continue at 5 second intervals until the display is returned to its normal position. If no cassette has been inserted, the display will show “NO TAPE”. Audio system Instruments and controls 183 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 184 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 184 Track selection Note: Press the track selection “TRK” key. The current track will be displayed as “SIDE 1” or “SIDE 2”. The track will be changed automatically at the end of the tape. Track search forward/backward Press the button. “SEEK FWD” will be shown on the display and the track search will run the tape forward to the start of the next track. Press the button. “SEEK RWD” will be shown on the display and the track search will run the tape backward to the start of the track currently playing. Track search can be interrupted by pressing the same button again. The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a break of at least 4 seconds between tracks. Fast forward/reverse Press the button. “FORWARD” will appear on the display and fast forward will start. Press the button. “REWIND” will appear on the display and fast reverse will start. Fast forward/reverse is stopped by pressing the same button again, or it will stop automatically at the beginning or the end of the tape. The track will automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape and play will begin. Index OM_203.book Seite 185 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Scanning Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system) # Press the S C button. “SEEK FWD” will appear on the display. Each track will be played for 8 seconds in ascending order. The search will stop if any of the S C , # , , , buttons are pressed. To enable optimum sound reproduction of cassettes recorded using the Dolby B system, press the “NR” key so the “NR” on the display is highlighted. To turn off Dolby B noise reduction, press the “NR” key so the “NR” on the display is not highlighted. Skipping of blank sections (Skip-Blank) 1 Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Press the “SB” key. The SkipBlank function is switched on or off. When switched on, the “SB” on the display is highlighted. With the “SB” function activated and no sound signal received for approximately 10 to 15 seconds, the tape will fast forward to the next sound signal. Audio system Instruments and controls 185 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 186 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Technical data 186 CD mode Only use CDs, which bear the label shown and that conform to the compact disc digital audio standard (IEC 60908). General notes on CD mode Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode, “CD TEMP HIGH” will appear on the display and muting will take place. The unit will then switch back to radio mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating level. Car care Use of CDs which do not meet this standard may cause damage to the CD changer. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an adapter. Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are too low, “CD TEMP LOW” will be displayed, but the CD will play. It will be sensitive to skipping if you are driving over rough roads. Warning! Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Do not remove the cover. The CD changer1 does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel. Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not write on the CDs or apply any label or other material or devices to the CDs. Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be used. Replace the CD in its container after use. Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight. The CD changer1 is a Class 1 laser product. There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover is opened or damaged. 1 Optional equipment Index OM_203.book Seite 187 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 CD changer1 installed Loading/emptying the CD magazine Slide the changer door to the right until it latches open and press the eject button . The magazine will be ejected. Remove the magazine. Pull out the CD tray to its stop and place the CDs in the recess of the tray, label side up. Push the tray into the magazine in the direction shown by the arrow. Insert the loaded magazine into the changer. 4 2 3 Important! 1 Close the door after the magazine has been inserted. 2 1 CD changer 2 CD magazine 3 CD tray 4 CD If a CD changer1 is installed, it can be operated from the front control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must be installed for CD playing. 1 Optional equipment Audio system Instruments and controls 187 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 188 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 188 Playing CDs Skipping tracks forward/backward Press the button. When the changer is used for the first time after removing/inserting a magazine, play begins at CD 1 track 1. After that, the CD most recently played will start at the point where it was last switched off. CDs stored in the magazine can be selected by using the station preset buttons 1-6. Press the played. The magazine slot number of the selected CD will be displayed after “CD”. The number of the track being played will be displayed after “TRACK”. If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, “NO CD” and the corresponding slot number will be displayed (e.g.“NO CD3”). After the last track on a CD has been played, the next CD will automatically be selected and played. button. The next track on the CD will be Press the button. If the track has been playing for more than10 seconds, it will revert to the start of that track. If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it will revert to the preceding track. To skip several tracks, the respective button must be pressed until the desired track is reached. If the beginning or end of the CD is reached during the search, the first or last track will be played. Index OM_203.book Seite 189 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Random play/repeat function Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button for audible fast forward. Press and hold the button for audible reverse. The tracks of the current CD are played in random order when the random feature (RDM) is selected. Press the “RDM” key to switch on. “RDM” will be highlighted. Press “RDM” again to switch off. The search will stop when the button is released. The played time of the track will be displayed during the search. The search mode will cancel if the beginning or end of the CD is reached. When the repeat function (RPT) has been selected, a particular track can be played for as many times as desired. Press the “RPT” key to switch on. “RPT” will be highlighted. Press “RPT” again to switch off. Scanning # Press the S C button. Each track will be played for 8 seconds in ascending order. The search will stop at the current track if any of the , , , ,S C # buttons are pressed. Audio system Instruments and controls Note: Both functions cannot be used simultaneously. 189 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 190 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 190 Direct track selection Telephone operation Tracks can be selected directly using the buttons on the alpha-numeric keypad. Press the “ function button, followed by the track number. Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz integrated portable cellular telephone1 can be performed and displayed via the system. Further instructions for operating the integrated telephone can be found in the operation guide for the telephone1. Track and time display Pressing the function button “T” displays the track number and elapsed playing time of the track being played. Pressing the function button “T” again displays the total number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD being played. After 8 seconds the display switches back to the main display. Switching the telephone on and off Switching on: Press the button. Switching off: Press and hold the button until “PHONE OFF” appears on the display. 1 Optional equipment Index OM_203.book Seite 191 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Adjusting the volume Calling up the telephone book Turning the control knob clockwise will increase the volume, counterclockwise will decrease the volume. The numbers stored in the telephone number memory can be called up via either name or number entries. The memory contents from the portable telephone must contain numbers and names in at least one memory location and the portable telephone must be connected to the vehicle coil cord in order to call up the telephone book. Refer to the “Memory download” section of the cellular telephone operation guide for more information. Note: The volume setting can be selected separately for the telephone, audio system and voice recognition system. Entering telephone number and starting dialing process Switching between name search and number search Enter the desired telephone number using the alphanumeric keypad. The number can have up to 32 digits, but only 13 of these can be displayed. The dialing process is started by pressing the “SND” key. The entered number can be corrected using the “CLR” key. Press “ABC” key - Name search Press “NUM” key - Number search Press the “CLR” key briefly, and the last digit will be deleted. Press and hold the “CLR” key, and the complete number will be deleted. Audio system Instruments and controls 191 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 192 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Practical hints Car care Technical data 192 Searching and selecting telephone book entries by name Searching and selecting telephone book entries by number Press the “ABC” key. The current name is shown on the display. The stored entries in alphabetical order can be selected using the or button. By pressing the or button, the stored entries can be selected according to alphabetical initial letters (e.g. A-Adam, B-Brown, M-Miller). Press the “NUM” key. The current number is shown on the display. The stored entries can be selected in numerical order using the or button. By pressing the or button, the stored entries can be selected in increments of 5 (e.g. Entry no. 2, Entry no. 7, etc.). Using the buttons - 0 on the alpha-numeric keypad the stored entries can be selected according initial letters (e.g. B-Brown, press button 2 twice). Placing a call O P R Note: Some signs and symbols cannot be displayed. When a number or a name has been selected using the method described above, press the “SND” key. Index OM_203.book Seite 193 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Abbreviated dialing from previously stored telephone numbers Manual repeat dialing (redial) The last number entered can be re-selected by pressing the “SND” key once, and the call can be placed by pressing the “SND” key a second time. The last dialed telephone number is shown on the display. Using the , , or button, the numbers stored in the re-dial memory of the telephone can be selected. Quick-dialing Enter the previously selected maximum 3-digit (1 - 999) number and press “RCL”. The telephone number previously stored under that number will be displayed. The abbreviation L and the number in the memory are shown in the top line of the display. Press the soft key “SND”. The call is set up. Speed-dialing Automatic repeat dialing (redial) Enter the memory location desired with buttons 0 . You can enter up to 2 digits. If no call can be placed, press the “SND” key. - O P R “REDIAL” is shown on the display and repeated attempts will be made for the next four minutes. To correct the last digit press the soft key “CLR”. Press the soft key “SND”. The phone number stored at this memory location will appear on the screen and the call is set up. The abbreviation “L” and the number in the memory are shown in the top line of the display. Audio system Instruments and controls 193 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 194 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Audio system Car care Technical data 194 Express-dialing Press one of the number buttons than 1 second. Practical hints Accepting incoming call in telephone mode - 0 O P R for more The phone number or the name stored at this memory location will appear on the screen. When the call is initiated, the call time will appear on the display. Note: Please be aware that button might already be reserved for an emergency call number, see page 196. Call hold feature While on the telephone, a second call can be accepted by pressing the “SND” key. The first call will be put on hold. Press “SND” to toggle between the calls. An additional call can be accepted after ending one of the previous calls. With an incoming call, a ringing tone can be heard and the message “CALL” appears on the display. Press the “SND” key to answer the call. Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode If the telephone is activated in the background (symbol “S” on the display), then a switch is made automatically to the telephone mode when a call is received. The audio source is muted, the ringing tone is heard and the message “CALL” appears. Press the soft key “SND” to answer the call. After the call has been terminated, the previously selected audio source is resumed. Index OM_203.book Seite 195 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Terminating call Component malfunctions A current call can be terminated by pressing the “END” button. The radio, CD changer1, and Mercedes-Benz integrated cellular telephone1 are part of a fiberoptic networked system. Failure of one of the components can lead to malfunctions of the other components. Please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at1-800-387-0100 for more information in the event of a malfunction. Muting a call Pressing the “MUT” key will silence the call. The caller can no longer hear you. To return to the conversation, press the “MUT” key again. 1 Optional equipment Audio system Instruments and controls 195 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 196 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Audio system Emergency call Important! If you press button for more than 1 second, the number stored in memory location 1 (for example 911) will be dialed. The 911 emergency call system is a public service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offence. You can make an emergency call to an emergency rescue station with a mobile communications network. The emergency call will be placed as long as the corresponding mobile communications network is available. To do this, switch the telephone on if you have not already done so. The call will also be placed if the unlock-code is not entered. Practical hints Car care Technical data 196 Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions are active. Check with your local network operating company. It may take some time to set up an emergency call. To use this function you must ensure that the number stored in memory location 1 is the number to be dialed in case of emergency. Note: If an emergency call cannot be connected, the message “SYSTM BUSY” appears. Index OM_203.book Seite 197 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Power windows Switches for: 1 left, front 2 right, front 3 left, rear 4 right, rear There are individual switches in the front passenger door and the rear doors for the respective windows. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. P 5 4 .2 5 -2 2 5 9 Opening the windows: Press the switch to resistance point. -2 6 Closing the windows: Pull the switch to resistance point. The control panel is located on the driver’s door. Release switch when window is in desired position. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 197 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 198 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 198 Express opening and closing Warning! Press or pull switch past resistance point and release – window opens or closes completely. When closing the windows, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. To interrupt procedure, briefly press or pull switch. If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop during the last few inches before closure and open slightly. When pulling and holding the switch to close the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked during the last few inches before closure, it will stop but not open slightly. The windows can also be opened and closed using: • the summer opening/convenience feature, see page 35. • the button O in the control panel of the climate control, see page 158 or of the automatic climate control, see page 167. • the button e in the control panel of the automatic climate control, see page 168. In case of obstruction, the automatic reversal will not operate if a door window is being closed by pulling the switch to its resistance point and holding it there, or when using the electronic key. The closing procedure of door windows can be immediately reversed by either pressing or pulling the switch, or pressing button Œ on the electronic key and holding it. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. Index OM_203.book Seite 199 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Synchronizing power windows Blocking of rear door window operation If the power supply was interrupted, (battery disconnected or low), the windows cannot be opened or closed by the express feature. To resynchronize the express feature, pull switch until the window is completely closed and hold for approximately 1 second. Repeat procedure for each window. The automatic full opening and closing procedure of the windows should now be restored. The switch (1) is located on the driver’s door. If no operation of the rear windows by switch (for instance by children) is desired, slide override switch (1) to the right; the N symbol becomes visible. Operation of the rear door windows with the switches located in the driver’s door is still possible. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 199 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 200 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Interior equipment Sliding/pop-up roof Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 200 Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof: Move the switch to resistance point in the required direction. Release the switch when the roof has reached the required position. Warning! When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. 1 to slide roof open 2 to slide roof closed 3 to raise roof at rear 4 to lower roof at rear When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. Index OM_203.book Seite 201 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Opening or closing the sliding/pop-up roof automatically With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract. Move the switch past resistance point in the direction required and release. The sliding/pop-up roof can also be opened and closed using: The sliding/pop-up roof opens or closes completely. • the summer opening/convenience feature, see page 35. Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof: Move the switch in any direction. If the movement of the sliding/pop-up roof is blocked during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and reopen slightly. • the button O in the control panel of the climate control, see page 158 or of the automatic climate control, see page 167. Warning! • the button ein the control panel of the automatic climate control, see page 168. When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. Notes: To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the sliding/pop-up roof. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur, see page 360. 201 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 202 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof The sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized if the power supply has been interrupted (battery disconnected or low), the sliding/pop-up roof has been closed manually or the sliding/pop-up roof does not open smoothly or malfunctions. • Press the switch in the “raise” (3) direction, wait until the sliding/pop-up roof is fully raised at rear and hold the switch for approximately 1 second. Practical hints 202 Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 203 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Interior lighting The interior lighting remains switched off, even when centrally unlocking the vehicle or opening a door or the electronic key is removed from the starter switch. 4 To select automatic function: Press the rocker switch to the center position. Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when unlocking the vehicle, opening a door or removing the electronic key from starter switch. Interior lamps are switched off (soft fade) delayed, when locking the vehicle, closing the doors or inserting the electronic key in starter switch. However, there will be no delay when the electronic key is in starter switch position 2. 1 Rear interior lights 5 Interior lamps, front: Press rocker switch in to switch front interior lamps on. The interior lighting stays on while the rocker switch is pressed in. Press the button to switch the rear passenger compartment lights on/off. 2 Right front reading lamp Switching off the front interior lighting: Press rocker switch to position (3) or (4). Press the button to switch the reading lamp on or off. The right reading lamp will be switched on or off. 6 Left front reading lamp: Press the button to switch the reading lamp on or off. The left reading lamp will be switched on or off. 3 To switch off automatic function: Press the rocker switch. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 203 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 204 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 204 Notes: Door entry lamps The time delay for the interior light to switch off after the electronic key is removed from the starter switch can be adjusted in the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “INT. ILLUMINATION DELAYED SWITCH-OFF”. See page 128. The appropriate entry lamp switches on if a door is opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is switched to automatic function. To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged with doors open, all interior lamps switch off after approximately 5 minutes, when the electronic key removed or in starter switch position 0. An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that all interior lamps are switched off. The entry lamp switches off automatically when the door is closed. Index OM_203.book Seite 205 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Rear window sunshade (optional) Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame. Warning! When operating the rear window sunshade, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure. The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately halted by briefly pressing the upper or lower half of the switch. Briefly press upper or lower half of the switch again to raise or lower the rear window sunshade completely. P 6 8 .5 0 -2 1 0 4 -2 6 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from starter switch, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury. The switch is located in the center console. Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Press the switch briefly: 1 to raise 2 to lower Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 205 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 206 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Sun visors Swing sun visors (2) down (arrow 3) to protect against sun glare. If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor (2) from the inner mounting (1) and pivot to the side. Practical hints Car care Technical data 206 Vanity mirrors 1 Illuminated vanity mirror With the visor engaged in its inner mounting (2), the lamp (4) can be switched on by opening the cover (3). Fold the cover (3) down to close the vanity mirror. Warning! Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Index OM_203.book Seite 207 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Interior Storage compartments and armrests Warning! Warning! To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf below the rear window. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 207 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 208 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Interior equipment Glove box Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 208 Notes: Prior to closing the glove box, close the compartment for glasses first. The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. See page 29 for instructions on how to remove the mechanical key from the electronic key (e.g. for valet parking service). 1 Unlocked position 2 Locked position 3 Glove box 4 Glove box lid release Pull to open Index OM_203.book Seite 209 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Storage compartment in front of armrest To open: Slide cover (5) rearward. To close: Slide cover (5) forward. Note: The compartment contains a lighter (see page 215), a coin holder, and a cup holder (see page 211). 5 Storage compartment in front of armrest Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 209 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 210 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 210 Storage compartment below the front armrest To change inclination of armrest: Pull up on armrest. To lower armrest: Pull handle (7). Notes: The storage compartment can be heated or cooled, see page 171. The compartment can get very warm due to its confined space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air outlet while heating the passenger compartment. P 6 8 .0 0 -2 5 9 2 -2 6 To open compartment in armrest: Lift armrest by handle (6). To open compartment under armrest: Lift armrest by handle (7). To close: Lower armrest until it engages in lock. Do not obstruct the air outlet in the storage compartment. Index OM_203.book Seite 211 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Cup holder P 6 8 .0 0 -2 7 1 5 -2 6 1 Cup holder in front seat armrest P 6 8 .0 0 -2 7 1 5 -2 6 Close cup holder: Push (arrow) until cup holder engages. Open cup holder: Push button (1) the cup holder slides out. Warning! Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height where the contents could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot liquids. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 211 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 212 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Interior equipment Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 212 To open: Push front of sliding compartment – the cup holder slides out. To close: Push the sliding compartment back until it engages. Warning! Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height where the contents could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot liquids. 2 Cup holder in rear seat armrest Index OM_203.book Seite 213 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Ashtrays Center console To open: Briefly touch the mark on the cover, the ashtray opens automatically. To remove ashtray insert from center console: Warning! Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. With the gear selector lever in position “N”, turn off the engine and set the parking brake. Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of unintended contact with the gear selector lever. Slide ashtray insert in direction of arrow (1) until the insert disengages. Grip ashtray insert at indents (left and right arrows) and remove from ashtray frame. Prior to removing the ashtray insert, move the gear selector lever to position “N”. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation To replace insert: Install insert into ashtray frame and push down to engage into place. 213 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 214 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Interior equipment Rear seats Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care 214 To open ashtray: Pull at top of cover. To remove insert: Press latch (2) and remove insert. To replace insert: Install insert and close the ashtray. Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 215 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Lighter Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. Push in lighter in (1); it will pop out automatically when hot. Warning! Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only. When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. P 6 8 .0 0 -2 7 1 4 -2 6 Note: 1 Center console lighter The lighter can be operated with electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2. The lighter is located in the center console compartment in front of the armrest, see page 209. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W. 215 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 216 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Parcel net in front passenger footwell Practical hints Car care 216 Ski sack (optional) A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc. Warning! Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants. Unfolding and loading 1. Fold armrest down (arrow). 2. Swing cover (1) down. Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 217 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 3. Open hook and loop strap (2) and pull ski sack into passenger compartment and unfold. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 4. Open flap in trunk by pulling handle (3). 217 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 218 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 218 5. From trunk, slide skis into ski sacks 6. Wrap strap around ski sack and armrest. Warning! 7. Close clasp (arrows 4 and 5) and pull strap tight to immobilize skis. The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other objects. Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause injury to vehicle occupants. Index OM_203.book Seite 219 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Unloading and folding 8. Connect snap hook (6) of front strap to eye (7) located on center tunnel in front of rear seat bench. 1. Loosen strap, open clasp by pressing tabs (arrows) together, and unload skis. 2. Close flap in trunk. 3. Disconnect snap hook (6) from eye (7). 4. Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise and place folded ski sack inside recess of backrest. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 219 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 220 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Interior equipment Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 220 Removal of ski sack For removal of the ski sack we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open while the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. Note: 5. Close ski sack compartment cover. To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk, always close the pass-through. Index OM_203.book Seite 221 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Enlarged cargo area (optional) Split folding rear seat bench 2. Pull handle (2) and fold seat cushion (3) forward. 1. Pull handle (1) located in trunk to unlock backrest. 3. Fully retract and fold down head restraints, see page 60. On vehicles with optional split folding rear seat backrest you can fold down the two sections separately to enlarge the cargo area. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 4. Fold backrest (4) forward. 221 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 222 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 222 Setting up rear seat bench 1. Pull backrest (4) up until it locks in its upright position. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest. The pop-up indicators (5) (left and right backrest section) are visible in unlocked position. With backrest sections in upright and locked position, the indicators (5) are fully lowered. 2. Fold seat cushion (3) back until it locks in place. Check for secure locking by pressing on the seat cushion. Warning! Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, cargo is being carried in the trunk, or the extended cargo area is not in use. Note: To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk, always lock backrest in its upright position. Index OM_203.book Seite 223 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Loading instructions (Vehicle with enlarged cargo area) The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle. Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible. The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of the vehicle. Note: The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. The enlarged cargo area should only be used for items which do not fit in the trunk alone. The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated on the certification tag which can be found on the left door pillar. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation 223 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 224 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Interior equipment Practical hints Car care Technical data 224 Warning! Cellular telephone In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. The vehicle is prepared for the installation of a cellular telephone. For further information and installation contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf below the rear window. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion. Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open while seat backrest sections not locked in their upright position. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. Warning! Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering or placing a call. Index OM_203.book Seite 225 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Telephone, general Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Warning! A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/ her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road and traffic conditions permit. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Interior equipment Instruments and controls Operation See separate instruction manual for instructions on how to operate the telephone. 225 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 226 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Garage door opener Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 226 Garage door opener The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled objects. Warning! When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. 2 1 When programming or operating the remote control make sure there is no possibility of anyone being harmed by the moving door. Note: 3 1 Signal transmitter keys 2 Indicator lamp 3 Portable remote control transmitter Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Index OM_203.book Seite 227 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control: For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the inside rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Garage door opener Instruments and controls Operation 227 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 228 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Garage door opener 3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the handheld transmitter button and the desired integrated remote control button. Do not release the buttons until completing step 4. 4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates successful programming of the new frequency signal). To program the remaining two buttons, follow steps 1 through 4. Note: If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully program the integrated remote control device to learn the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door opener could be equipped with the “rolling code feature”. Practical hints Car care Technical data 228 Rolling code programming: To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.) 1. Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, reference to garage door opener operator’s manual. 2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit (which activated the “training light”). Note: Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate step 3. Index OM_203.book Seite 229 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Operation of remote control: 3. Firmly press and release the programmed integrated remote control transmit button. Press and release same button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may required you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training.) 1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. 2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate the remote control device. The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. 4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed button on the integrated remote control transmitter. Erasing the remote control memory: Canadian programming: 1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the integrated remote control transmitter button (note steps 2 through 4 in the “Programming” portion) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. Garage door opener Instruments and controls Operation 2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the control lamp blink rapidly, will erase the codes of all three channels. 229 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 230 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 OM_203.book Seite 231 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Driving Control and operation of radio transmitters .....................232 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) .................................233 Maintenance ...................................233 Tele Aid ...........................................234 Catalytic converter ........................244 Emission control ............................245 Starter switch .................................246 Starting and turning off the engine ..................................248 Manual transmission ....................249 Automatic transmission ...............251 Parking brake .................................260 Contents - Driving Instruments and controls Operation Driving instructions ...................... 261 Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ....... 261 Drinking and driving ................ 261 Pedals .......................................... 261 Power assistance ........................ 262 Brakes .......................................... 262 Driving off ................................... 263 Parking ........................................ 264 Tires ............................................. 265 Snow chains ............................... 267 Winter driving instructions ................................ 268 Deep water .................................. 270 Passenger compartment ............271 Traveling abroad .........................271 Cruise control .................................272 Brake assist system (BAS) ............275 Antilock brake system (ABS) ........................................... 276 Electronic stability program (ESP) ...........................................278 What you should know at the gas station .......................282 Check regularly and before a long trip ......................284 231 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 232 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Control and operation of radio transmitters Practical hints Car care Technical data 232 Control and operation of radio transmitters COMAND, radio and telephone Telephones and two-way radio Warning! Warning! Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road and traffic conditions permit. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. 1 Observe all legal requirements. Index OM_203.book Seite 233 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) Maintenance The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate vehicle and engine speeds. We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called for by the FSS. Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Service Booklet at the designated times/ mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds. Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear. We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1” only at moderate speeds (for hill driving). For information on the Flexible service system (FSS), see page 138. After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually increased to the permissible maximum. The first 1 000 miles Instruments and controls Operation 233 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 234 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 234 Tele Aid Important! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If the system is not activated the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays on after turning electronic key in starter switch to position 2 and the message “TELE AID – NOT ACTIVATED” will be shown in the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds. If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel, for raising press button æ and for lowering press button ç. To activate, press the “SOS” button, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required. Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call, you will receive a user ID and password via first call mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock, Info Services* profile and more. * Optional (available only with COMAND) System self-check (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. Initially, after turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on). The message “TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP” appears for approx. 10 seconds in the multifunction display. Index OM_203.book Seite 235 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Important! Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The message “EMERGENCY CALL – CONNECTING CALL” appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated. Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, in the “Roadside Assistance” button and in the “Information” button do not remain illuminated constantly in red and the message “TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP” is not displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE” appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle. Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically: • following an accident in which the Emergency Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy, • if the antitheft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, see pages 46 and 47. An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror labeled “SOS”, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See below for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually. Tele Aid Instruments and controls 235 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 236 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 236 The Tele Aid system is available if: • it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services and cellular air time • the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the response center. Note: Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the response center. Warning! If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. Index OM_203.book Seite 237 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Initiating an emergency call manually Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open. Press the SOS button (2) briefly. The indicator lamp in the SOS button (2) will flash until the emergency call is concluded. Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center. Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is concluded. Tele Aid Instruments and controls 237 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 238 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 238 Warning! If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Roadside Assistance button • Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button •. Pressing and holding the button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID – ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE” appears in the multifunction display. The nature of the need for assistance can then be described. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as labor and/or towing charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information. These programs are only available in the USA: • Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable, • Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data. Index OM_203.book Seite 239 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Notes: Information button ¡ The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (together with the “SOS” button and the Information button ¡). Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to the Customer Assistance Center. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message “INFO – CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “INFO – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). See system self-check on page 234 when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display. A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE” appears in the multifunction display. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you. Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel. For more details concerning Tele Aid, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password, sent to you separately, to learn more (USA only). Tele Aid Instruments and controls 239 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 240 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 240 Notes: Important! The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (together with the “SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance button •). If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-7569018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible. See system self-check on page 234 when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “INFO – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display. Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel. Upgrade Signals Tele Aid system processes calls using the following priority. • Automatic emergency – First priority • Manual emergency – Second priority • Roadside assistance – Third priority • Information – Fourth priority Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is not available, the operator may Index OM_203.book Seite 241 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND system operation will resume (only vehicles with COMAND). Notes: The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing ì button on the multifunction steering wheel. Important! When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio system or the COMAND system audio (only vehicles with COMAND) is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. Tele Aid Instruments and controls 241 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 242 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tele Aid Practical hints Car care Technical data 242 Remote door unlock Notes: In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and no other key is available, contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement. The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available. Then return to your vehicle and pull recessed handle in trunk lid for minimum of 20 seconds until the “SOS” button is flashing. The message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call. The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature. The SOS button will flash and the message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants. If the recessed handle in trunk lid was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling recessed handle again. Index OM_203.book Seite 243 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Stolen vehicle tracking services Once information is available, the message “NEW INFO RECEIVED - READ LATER WHEN STOPPED?” will appear. Select “Yes”. With the vehicle stopped in a safe location press SVC, then select “View Info Service of mm.dd.yyyy hh.mm”. Messages will be retained for 30 minutes once the ignition is switched off. In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident to the police who will issue a numbered incident report. Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center. The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to Law Enforcement. Important! Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means. Info Services (optional-except Canada) (only vehicles with COMAND) Info Services categories include news, sports, stocks, weather and calendar reminders. Choices can be selected via www.mbusa.com or by calling 1-800-FORMERcedes. Warning! If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button does not illuminate during or remains illuminated after the system self-check or if the message “TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP” appears in the multifunction display, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. To request Info Services press the SVC button on the COMAND system, then select “SEND NEW REQUEST FOR INFO SERVICE”. “NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST TRANSMITTED” will appear in the COMAND display and call status messages will appear in the multifunction display. Tele Aid Instruments and controls 243 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 244 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Catalytic converter Practical hints Car care Technical data 244 Catalytic converter Warning! Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet. As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Caution! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle. Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat, which could start a fire. Index OM_203.book Seite 245 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Emission control Warning! Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service Booklet. Emission control Instruments and controls Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open. 245 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 246 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Starter switch Practical hints Car care Technical data 246 Starter switch key or with the electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1 the selector lever is locked in position “P”. 1 Most electrical consumers can be operated. For detailed information see respective subjects. 2 Driving position. Gear selector lever is unlocked. To move the selector lever out of position “P” firmly depress the service brake pedal. 3 Starting position. See page 248 for instructions on starting and turning off the engine. 0 The electronic key can be withdrawn in this position only. The steering is locked when the electronic key is removed from the starter switch. If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the electronic key can be removed only with the selector lever in position “P”. After removing the electronic Warning! When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal injury. Index OM_203.book Seite 247 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Important! Notes: If the electronic key is left in the starter switch position 0 for a extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the lock. In this case, remove electronic key from starter switch and reinsert. A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened with the electronic key is in starter switch position 1 or 0. If the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be sufficiently charged. See battery on page 342 or jump starting on page 344. Caution! To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave the electronic key in starter switch position 0. With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the alternator (output) is limited. It is therefore recommended that you turn off unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stopand-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of the battery. Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system may be minimized by turning off the following power consumers, for example: Heated seats, rear window defroster. In addition, the automatic climate air volume control should be set to the lowest position. Starter switch Instruments and controls 247 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 248 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Starting and turning off the enginge Practical hints Car care Technical data 248 Starting and turning off the engine Vehicles with manual transmission: Before starting Do not depress accelerator. Fully depress clutch pedal, otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the integrated safety interlock. Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector lever is in position “P” or “N” (gearshift lever in neutral). Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 2. Turn electronic key in starter switch clockwise to the stop. Release only when the engine is firing regularly. Important! Starting Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not depress accelerator. Briefly turn electronic key in starter switch clockwise to the stop and release. The starter will engage until the engine is running. If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops, turn electronic key completely to the left and repeat starting the engine. After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Due to the installed starter non-repeat feature, the electronic key must be turned completely to the left before attempting to start the engine again. In areas where temperatures frequently drop below -4°F (-20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater be installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will advise you on this subject, see page 269. Turning off Turn the electronic key in the starter switch to position 0 to turn off the engine. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The electronic key can only be removed with the selector lever in position “P”. Index OM_203.book Seite 249 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Manual transmission Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into reverse; to shift into reverse, pull the gearshift lever up. Do not exceed the maximum engine speed in the individual gears. Refer to tachometer (see page 101) for engine speeds. Important! When vehicle is parked, always be sure to engage first or reverse gear and firmly set parking brake. When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb. Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Do not exceed engine speed limits, see page 101. See illustration for gearshift lever positions corresponding to the individual gears. Manual transmission Instruments and controls Operation 249 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 250 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Manual transmission Practical hints Car care Technical data 250 Warning! Warning! For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever not engaged in 1st or reverse gear and parking brake engaged is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged 1st or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gearshift lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury. Always set the parking brake in addition to engaging 1st or reverse gear, see page 260 for parking brake. Warning! When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb. On slippery road surfaces as well as high engine speeds, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. Index OM_203.book Seite 251 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon • Selector lever position • Program mode selector • Accelerator position • Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation and the road characteristics. Important! When parking the vehicle or before working on the vehicle with the engine running, firmly depress the parking brake pedal and shift the selector lever into “P”. P 2 7 .0 0 -2 0 7 0 -2 7 Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation 251 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 252 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Practical hints Car care Technical data 252 Driving Important! The selector lever is automatically locked while in position “P”. To move the selector lever out of position “P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release. After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”, wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before accelerating, especially when the engine is cold. Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the service brake is applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the selector lever is in drive or reverse position. Accelerator position Warning! It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up on the accelerator — the transmission shifts up again. Index OM_203.book Seite 253 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Stopping Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to come on. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication. For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service brake. For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N” or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake. Warning! When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids unnecessary transmission heat build up. Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Maneuvering Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position “P”, see page 260 for parking brake. To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never abruptly step on the accelerator. When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb. Warning! To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow), alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying slight partial throttle. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the selector lever from position “P”, which could result in an accident or serious injury. 253 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 254 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Practical hints Car care Technical data 254 Selector lever position 3 3 3 3 1 Program mode indicator, see page 258 2 Gear range indicators The current selector lever position is highlighted in the gear range indicator display (2). The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever. 3 Light emitting gear range indicators There is an additional indication of the current selector lever position on the cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators (3) come on when a switch is activated (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or opening a door). It stays on for approx. 15 minutes. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever. Index OM_203.book Seite 255 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Park position Neutral The park position is to be used when parking the vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always use the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever in park to secure the vehicle. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage “N” while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads, see page 268 for winter driving instructions). Note: Important! The electronic key can only be removed from the starter switch with the selector lever in position “P”. With the electronic key removed, the selector lever is locked in position “P”. Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with selector lever in “N” can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Reverse gear The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle stopped. Dependent on the program mode selector switch position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the reverse gear is different. However, it is not possible to change the program mode while in reverse. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation 255 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 256 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Gear selection for special circumstances The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever in position “D”. The gear range currently selected is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Briefly press selector lever in the “D –” direction: The transmission will shift from the current gear range to the next lower gear range. Press and hold selector lever in the “D –” direction: The selector lever position display will switch to the gear range currently selected by the automatic transmission. Shifting into another gear range that allows for quicker acceleration or to slow the vehicle down is possible. Downshifts can also be performed. Note: To avoid overevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in “D –” direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per minute limit would be exceeded. Practical hints Car care Technical data 256 Briefly press selector lever in the “D +” direction: The transmission will shift from the current gear range to the next higher gear range. If the transmission is already in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one gear is possible. Press and hold selector lever in the “D +” direction: The transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear range “D”. Warning! On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. Important! With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”, upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperatures. During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift and increased engine noise might be perceived as a Index OM_203.book Seite 257 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Gear ranges: malfunction. However, neither the engine nor transmission are negatively affected by this mode of operation. Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for performance driving. The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine temperatures below 95°F (35°C). Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for moderately steep hills. Since the transmission does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear selection will allow use of the engine’s braking power downhill. To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved to a lower gear range, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear, if the engine’s revolutions per minute limit would be exceeded. In this case there will be no downshift, even when the vehicle speed reaches the engine’s rpm limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the service brakes. Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in mountainous regions or under extreme operating conditions. This gear selection will allow use of the engine’s braking power when descending steep grades. To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. Use this position, which makes maximum use of the engine’s braking effect, while descending very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h). Note: To avoid overevving the engine on rpm limit, the transmission will upshift automatically to the next higher gear as long as the vehicle is accelerating. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation 257 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 258 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Automatic transmission Practical hints Car care Technical data 258 S Program mode selector switch Standard mode Press switch. “S” is displayed in the gear range indicator display, see page 254. Use this mode for all regular driving. The vehicle starts out in 1st gear. P 2 7 .0 0 -2 0 7 2 -2 6 The transmission is provided with a selector switch (1) for Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W” program modes. The program mode currently selected is indicated in the gear range indicator display. Accelerator Operation: Fast on = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly (not into kickdown position) while driving continuously, rather than depressing the accelerator pedal in the usual manner, will cause the automatic transmission to shift down into a lower gear. This gear shifting process is dependent on the current vehicle speed. Fast off = there will be no upshift when releasing the accelerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the engine’s braking power during performance driving. Index OM_203.book Seite 259 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 W Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode Emergency operation (Limp home mode) Press switch. “W” is displayed in the gear range indicator display, see page 254. The vehicle starts out in 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st gear, or with accelerator pedal in kick-down position. If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on. The “W” mode helps to improve traction and driving stability of the vehicle. In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be activated. The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode. To engage 2nd gear or reverse: Caution! 1. Stop the vehicle. Never change the program mode when the selector lever is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared. 2. Move selector lever to position “P”. 3. Turn off the engine. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. Important! 5. Restart the engine. Always be certain of the program mode selected since the vehicle driving characteristics change with the selection of the program mode. 6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear). Have the transmission checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Dependent on the program mode selector switch position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes. Automatic transmission Instruments and controls Operation 259 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 260 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Parking brake Parking brake Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 260 To engage, firmly depress parking brake pedal. When the electronic key is in starter switch position 2, the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should come on brightly. To release the parking brake, pull handle on instrument panel. The brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should go out. A warning sounds and the parking brake warning message appears in the multifunction display (see page 299), if you start to drive without having released the parking brake. Also see brake warning lamp on page 288. Warning! When leaving the vehicle always remove the electronic key from the starter switch, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident or serious injury. Index OM_203.book Seite 261 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Driving instructions Drinking and driving Drive sensibly – Save Fuel Warning! Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions. Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgement. To save fuel you should: The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is sharply increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. • keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures, • remove unnecessary loads, • remove roof rack when not in use, Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs. • allow engine to warm up under low load use, • avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration, Pedals • have all maintenance work performed at regular intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly country. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 261 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 262 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Power assistance Warning! When the engine is not running, the brake and steering systems are without power assistance. Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehicle. Practical hints Car care Technical data 262 Excessive use of road salt and other snow melting chemicals spread on roads during the winter months may cause a build up of moisture or residue to form on the braking components. This build up or residue could cause light corrosion of the braking components if the vehicle is parked with the brakes cold. Apply steady and even braking pressure when stopping the vehicle to warm up and dry the brake components. Brakes Important! Warning! Please pay attention to the function of the brake assist system (BAS), see page 275. After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components or salty road conditions, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads. It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident. The condition of the parking brake system is checked each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required maintenance service. If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir. Have the brake system inspected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Index OM_203.book Seite 263 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Caution! All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Warning! After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream will cool down the brakes faster. If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. Driving off Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 263 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 264 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Parking Warning! To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: 1. Keep right foot on service brake pedal. 2. Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 3. Move the selector lever to position “P” (manual transmission: first or reverse gear). 4. Slowly release service brake pedal. 5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb. 6. Turn the electronic key to starter switch position 0 and remove. 7. Take the electronic key and lock vehicle when leaving. Practical hints Car care Technical data 264 Important! It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move selector lever to position “P” (manual transmission: first or reverse gear). When parking on hills, always set the parking brake. Index OM_203.book Seite 265 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Tires Warning! If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the roadway. Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs. Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. Warning! The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. 265 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 266 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures). Warning! Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Aquaplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. Practical hints Car care Technical data 266 Tire traction The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point. Warning! If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance as compared with summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not snow or ice covered. Index OM_203.book Seite 267 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Tire speed rating Snow chains Vehicles without Sport Package: Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h). Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the speed rating. Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions. Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow. Warning! Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control switch to OFF, refer to page 280. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and resulting in personal injury and possible death. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 267 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 268 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move selector lever to position “N” or in case of manual transmission declutch. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action. Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done without endangering other drivers on the road. Practical hints Car care Technical data 268 If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed while observing the safety rules in the previous paragraph. Warning! If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Index OM_203.book Seite 269 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Winter driving Note: Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter. In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the antilock brake system (ABS) and electronic stability program (ESP) can only be achieved with M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance. • Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil which is not approved for winter operation. For viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity, see page 383. • Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration. • Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures, see page 323. • Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low ambient temperatures. • Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on all four wheels for the winter season. Observe permissible maximum speed for M+S rated radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 269 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 270 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving instructions Block heater (Canada only) The engine is equipped with a block heater. The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Practical hints Car care Technical data 270 Deep water Caution! Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the engine compartment or passenger compartment, being ingested by the air intake, possibly causing damage to electrical components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Index OM_203.book Seite 271 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Passenger compartment Traveling abroad Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. Driving instructions Instruments and controls Operation 271 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 272 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Cruise control Practical hints Car care Technical data 272 1 Accelerate and set: Lift lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever up to accelerate. 2 Decelerate and set: Depress lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever down to decelerate. Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired speed with the accelerator. Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be released. The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed manner, for example over long distances, as it automatically maintains the set speed by actively regulating the throttle setting. Any given speed above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by operating the lever. The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by using the accelerator. After the accelerator is released, the previously set speed will be resumed automatically. If a set speed is to be increased or decreased slightly, e. g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h) increments. When the lever is released, the newly set speed remains. Index OM_203.book Seite 273 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 4 Resume 3 Canceling If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when driving at a speed exceeding approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise control. To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to position 3. When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle speed drops below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the cruise control will be canceled. The last memorized speed is canceled when the electronic key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 0. If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Important! Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the cruise control off. Driving systems Instruments and controls 273 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 274 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 274 Warning! Vehicles with automatic transmission: Only use the cruise control if the traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. Downshift occurs (max. to 3rd gear) to maintain the set cruise controlled speed by using the engine’s braking power. • The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position. • The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion can result in wheel spin and loss of control. The set cruise controlled speed is switched off when declutching exceeds four seconds during downshifting a gear. The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. Notes: If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the following will assist in maintaining the set cruise controlled speed: Vehicles with manual transmission: Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control is switched off. Use the lever to resume the previously set speed. Index OM_203.book Seite 275 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Brake assist system (BAS) Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum BAS assistance. Warning! To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous full braking power during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure. BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. If the BAS warning message is displayed, a malfunction has been detected in the system. The brake system functions in the usual manner, but without BAS. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS is also switched off. If a BAS warning message is displayed, have the BAS checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers by having maximum power boost applied to the brakes more quickly in emergency braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s braking style. This can help reduce braking distances over what ordinary driving and braking style might do. The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS). Driving systems Instruments and controls 275 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 276 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Antilock brake system (ABS) Warning! Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm, steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. Important! The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers. The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. Practical hints Car care Technical data 276 At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation. Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle. In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this manner only can the ABS be most effective. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pedal pressure because of the increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Index OM_203.book Seite 277 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 ABS control If the ABS malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2 and should go out with the engine running. Warning! ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake system functions in the usual manner, but without antilock assistance. For ABS malfunction indicator lamp, see page 291. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on with the engine running. If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the ABS is operational. Driving systems Instruments and controls Note: To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as appropriate. 277 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 278 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Electronic stability program (ESP) Warning! ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving conditions. Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in operation. Practical hints Car care Technical data 278 Important! If the ESP warning lamp v flashes: • During take-off apply as little throttle as possible. • While driving ease up on the accelerator. • Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. • Do not switch off the ESP. Caution! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see page 347, “Towing the vehicle”), the engine must be shut off (electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Index OM_203.book Seite 279 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Notes: When testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. The yellow ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer dial comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESP warning message is displayed, a malfunction has been detected in the system. Only partial engine output will be available. In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains. Have the ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Synchronizing ESP If the power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or empty), the ESP warning message may be displayed with the engine running. For ESP warning message, see page 292. With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched off. Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The ESP warning message should go out. Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels, including the spare wheel, must have the same tire size. Driving systems Instruments and controls 279 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 280 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Driving systems Practical hints Car care Technical data 280 ESP control switch To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, switch off ESP by pressing the upper half (1) of the ESP switch. The ESP warning lamp v located in the speedometer dial, is continuously illuminated. Warning! When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. P 4 2 .4 5 -2 2 4 5 -2 6 ESP control switch located on center console. 1 Press to switch ESP off ESP warning lamp v in located in speedometer dial comes on. 2 Press to switch ESP on ESP warning lamp v in located in speedometer dial goes out. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with the switch in the OFF position. If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient traction. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds up to approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches off at 50 mph (80 km/h). Index OM_203.book Seite 281 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Notes: Important! Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. If the ESP warning lamp flashes: • During take-off, apply as little throttle as possible. • While driving, ease up on the accelerator. The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial, starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP: press lower half (2) of the switch (the ESP warning lamp in the speedometer dial goes out). Warning! ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in circumstances described above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers. Driving systems Instruments and controls 281 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 282 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display What you should know at the gas station What you should know at the gas station Fuel supply Practical hints Car care Technical data 282 Open flap by pushing near front (arrow). Turn fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in tank has been released, then remove cap. Failure to remove slowly could result in personal injury. See page 360 for manual release of fuel filler flap. Fuel To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit. Only fill fuel tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill. Warning! Warning! Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon removing the filler nozzle which could cause personal injury. Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see page 286 for notes on the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp. Index OM_203.book Seite 283 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Spark plugs Fuel tank capacity approximately 16.4 US gal (62.0 l). This includes approximately 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) reserve. Approved spark plugs, refer to “Technical Data”. Use premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON). Air conditioner Engine oil R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant, refer to “Technical Data”. Checking oil level, see instructions on page 141 and 321. Bulbs High and low beams: H7 (55 W), low beam: Xenon (optional) fog lamps: H B4 (55 W), turn signal lamps, front: 1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp), parking and standing lamps, front: W 5W (5 W) side marker lamps, front: 5 W/4 cp, turn signal lamps, rear: PY 21 W bulb (yellow), stop lamps: P 21 W/32 cp bulb, rear fog lamp, driver’s side: P 21 W/32 cp bulb, tail, parking, standing and side marker lamp: R 5 W/4 cp, backup lamps: P 21 W/32 cp, license plate lamps: 5 W/4 cp Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service Products sheet. Coolant For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For further information refer to page 322. Tire pressure For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside the fuel filler flap. See page 341 for further details. What you should know at the gas station Instruments and controls Operation Driving 283 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 284 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Instrument cluster display Driving Check regularly and before a long trip Practical hints Car care Technical data 284 Check regularly and before a long trip 1 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For refilling reservoir see page 323. 2 Coolant level, see “Coolant level” on page 322 3 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed), see “Brake fluid” on page 383. 3 2 Opening hood, see page 318. Removing fuse box cover, see page 316. P Vehicle lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on 0 0 . 4 0 - 2 0 0 5 - 2 6page 351. Exterior lamp switch, see page 143. Index OM_203.book Seite 285 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster .........286 On-board diagnostic system .........286 Check engine malfunction indicator lamp .............................286 Brake warning lamp ..................288 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp ....289 Fuel reserve warning .................290 ABS malfunction indicator lamp ............................. 291 Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp ...............292 Seat belt nonusage warning lamp .............................292 Contents - Instrument cluster display Instruments and controls Operation Driving Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center console .................... 292 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .... 292 Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display .............. 293 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................ 295 BATTERY / ALTERNATOR ....... 296 ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM .... 297 BRAKE ASSIST ........................... 297 BRAKE PAD WEAR .................... 298 BRAKE FLUID ............................ 298 PARKING BRAKE ....................... 299 SEAT BELT SYSTEM .................. 299 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. (Electronic stability program) . 300 COOLANT (coolant level) .............................301 COOLANT (coolant temperature) ................302 ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................303 LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................304 LAMP SENSOR ...........................306 DOOR ...........................................306 TRUNK OPEN .............................307 HOOD ...........................................307 TELEPHONE – FUNCTION .......308 TELE AID .....................................308 WASHER FLUID .........................309 RESTRAINT SYSTEM ................. 310 KEY ............................................... 310 FUEL RESERVE ...........................311 UNDERVOLTAGE .........................311 STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. ........... 312 285 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 286 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General information: If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up during the bulb self-check when turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 2, have it checked and replaced if necessary. Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by authorized Mercedes-Benz Center qualified technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service Booklet. Practical hints Car care Technical data 286 Warning! Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open. On-board diagnostic system Check engine malfunction indicator lamp Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the engine is running, it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management system, emission control system, systems which impact emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you Index OM_203.book Seite 287 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we recommend that you have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp comes on, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuosly and/or the vehicle is not driving normally (e.g. malfunction of the fuel management system or running out of fuel), serious damage can occur to the emission system. Please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. With some exceptions, the control module switches off the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists during three consecutive cycles. An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the passenger compartment near to the parking brake pedal, allowing the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control module monitors emission control components that either provide input signals to or receive output signals from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from interruptions or failure of any of these components are indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are simultaneously stored in the SFI control module. Malfunction and indicator lamps Instruments and controls Operation 287 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 288 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps Brake warning lamp Except Canada Canada only When the brake warning lamp and message appear while the engine is running, this means: • there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir (engine running and parking brake released), or • the parking brake is set (engine running). Practical hints Car care Technical data 288 Warning! Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. Note: If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Index OM_203.book Seite 289 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp After the lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the components and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a malfunction by coming on again. When turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster comes on. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go out after approximately 4 seconds. Warning! In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. When turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2 the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster comes on. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go out when the engine is running. The operational readiness of the airbag system is verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. See page 73 for notes on airbags, see page 71 for belt tensioners and page 63 for infant and child seat restraint. Malfunction and indicator lamps Instruments and controls Operation 289 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 290 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps Practical hints Car care Technical data 290 Fuel reserve warning After refueling the vehicle, the message “1 MALFUNCTION” appears in the multifunction display when turning the electronic key in starter switch to position 2. This malfunction message has to be cleared, see page 119 for notes on the malfunction/ warning message memory. P 5 4 .3 0 -3 6 0 9 -2 6 1 Fuel reserve indicator When the warning lamp (1) comes on after starting the engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of approximately 2.1 US gal (8 liters). In addition to the warning lamp, the message “RESERVE FUEL” – “VISIT FUEL STATION” appears in the multifunction display. See page 282 for notes on refueling the vehicle. Index OM_203.book Seite 291 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 ABS malfunction indicator lamp With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off. The malfunction indicator lamps and malfunction messages in the multifunction display come on with the engine running. The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2 and should go out with the engine running. A B S If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the ABS is operational. When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and warning in the instrument cluster remains illuminated while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake system functions in the usual manner, but without antilock assistance. Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. See page 276 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS). A malfunctioning ABS control unit can possibly affect the operation of other systems (e.g. Navigation, Automatic transmission). Be guided accordingly with respect to the use of those systems and have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Malfunction and indicator lamps Instruments and controls Operation 291 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 292 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and indicator lamps Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp The yellow ESP warning lamp in the speedometer dial comes on with the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It should go out with engine running. If the ESP malfunction indicator lamp remains illuminated with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the system. Pressing the accelerator pedal will require greater effort. Only partial engine output will be available. See electronic stability program (ESP) on page 278 if the warning lamp lights up or flashes when the vehicle is moving. Seat belt nonusage warning lamp Practical hints Car care Technical data 292 Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center console AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp The ü indicator lamp will light up for approximately 6 seconds when you turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. It does not light up if there is a fault in the system. The ü indicator lamp stays lit as long as a Baby SmartTM child seat is properly installed on the front passenger seat. It indicates that the front passenger airbag is switched off. See page 70 for BabySmartTM airbag and its deactivation system. With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the seat belt nonusage warning lamp comes on, and a warning sounds for a short time if the drivers seat belt is not fastened. After starting the engine, the seat belt nonusage warning lamp blinks for a brief period to remind the driver and passengers to fasten seat belts. Baby SmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. Index OM_203.book Seite 293 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display Warning! The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. Malfunction and warning messages for the following systems will be displayed immediately in the multifunction display. They are divided into three categories. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. Category C1: Messages of most immediate priority. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats. These cannot be cleared from the instrument cluster using the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 100). The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the ü indicator lamp remains illuminated. Categories C2 and C3: Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat. Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the light remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation Messages of less immediate priority. These can be cleared from the instrument cluster using the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 100) and are then stored in the malfunction message memory. See page 119. 293 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 294 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 294 Note: Warning! Certain malfunction and warning messages are accompanied by an audible signal. Malfunction and warning messages in red are always accompanied by an audible signal. All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where malfunction indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Temporary messages such as “TRUNK OPEN!” will not be stored in the malfunction message memory. Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. Index OM_203.book Seite 295 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* VISIT WORKSHOP! DISPLAY FAULTY 2 VISIT WORKSHOP! DISPLAY FAULTY 2 * C = Category, see page 293 * C = Category, see page 293 This message is displayed to indicate that the information being relayed by the engine control unit is no longer complete. The display for coolant temperature gauge, tachometer, or the cruise control may have failed. The displays for several systems have failed. Some systems themselves may also have failed. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 295 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 296 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 296 BATTERY /ALTERNATOR This message indicates a malfunction which must be repaired immediately. It may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Line 1 Line 2 C* BATTERY/ALTERNATOR VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 293 Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Index OM_203.book Seite 297 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 BRAKE ASSIST ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* ABS SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 BRAKE ASSIST NOT AVAILABLE! 2 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!1 2 BRAKE ASSIST VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 293 * C = Category, see page 293 See page 276 for notes on the antilock brake system (ABS). A malfunction has been detected in the system. The brake system functions in the usual manner, but without brake assist system (BAS). 1 The display or the system is malfunctioning See page 275 for notes on the brake assist system (BAS). Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 297 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 298 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 298 BRAKE FLUID BRAKE PAD WEAR Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* BRAKE PAD WEAR VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 BRAKE FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 * C = Category, see page 293 * C = Category, see page 293 When this message appears during braking, it indicates that the brake pads are worn down. Warning! Have the brake system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. OM_203.book Seite 299 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 SEAT BELT SYSTEM PARKING BRAKE Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* PARKING BRAKE ENGAGE BRAKE! 1 SEAT BELT SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP! 1 PARKING BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE! 1 PASSENGER SEAT BELT FASTEN SEAT BELT! 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT FASTEN SEAT BELT! 2 * C = Category, see page 293 * C = Category, see page 293 Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 299 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 300 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 300 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. (Electronic stability program) 1 The enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and the torque reduction feature are unavailable. 2 This message may be displayed if the power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or empty). Synchronize ESP, see page 279 3 The system is temporarily unavailable. The reason could be that the self-diagnosis has not been completed. The display will clear itself after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph (2o km/h). Line 1 Line 2 C* ELEC. STABIL. PROG. NOT AVAILABLE!1, 2, 3, 4 2 ELEC. STABIL. PROG. VISIT WORKSHOP!1, 5 2 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!6 2 4 The system is unavailable due to low voltage, e.g. battery not being charged. 5 A malfunction has been detected in the system. In case of ESP malfunction the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and the ESP switch in the center console does not function. If in addition the ABS is malfunctioning, only partial engine output will be available. 6 The display or the system is malfunctioning. * C = Category, see page 293 Index OM_203.book Seite 301 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 COOLANT (coolant level) The low engine coolant level warning should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have the cooling system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Note: Line 1 Line 2 C* COOLANT CHECK LEVEL! 2 Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage. Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving, see page 137. See page 323 for instructions on topping up the coolant. * C = Category, see page 293 When this message appears while driving, the coolant level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks are noticeable and the engine temperature does not increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station and have coolant added to the coolant system. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation Warning! Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned. 301 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 302 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data 302 COOLANT (coolant temperature) During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120°C. The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 120°C. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Warning! Line 1 Line 2 C* COOLANT STOP, ENGINE OFF!1 1 COOLANT VISIT WORKSHOP!2 2 * C = Category, see page 293 1 This may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 2 The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. Observe the coolant temperature gauge. See page 137 Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down. Index OM_203.book Seite 303 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 ENGINE OIL LEVEL 3 There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil level indicator on page 141. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. Check the engine oil level immediately. See Engine oil level indicator on page 141 and check the engine for visible leakage (loss of oil). It may be that there is water in the engine oil. Have the engine oil checked. 5 The measuring system is malfunctioning. Line 1 Line 2 C* ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK LEVEL!1 2 ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP, ENGINE OFF!2 1 ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL13 2 ENGINE OIL VISIT WORKSHOP!4 2 ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP!5 2 When the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL!” message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick. When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil. * C = Category, see page 293. The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 1 The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil level indicator on page 141. 2 There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 303 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 304 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 304 LIGHTING SYSTEM Line 1 Line 2 C* TURN SIGNAL F, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 BRAKE LIGHT2 VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 BRAKE LIGHT, L3 CHECK LAMPS! 2 BRAKE LIGHT, R3 CHECK LAMPS! 2 3RD STOP LAMP3 CHECK LAMPS! 2 Line 1 Line 2 C* HIGH BEAM, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 LOW BEAM,L CHECK LAMPS! 2 HIGH BEAM, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 LOW BEAM,R CHECK LAMPS! 2 LICENSE PLATE L, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!1 2 LICENSE PLATE L, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN SIGNAL, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 LIGHTS SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! 1 TURN SIGNAL, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 AUTOM. LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY! 1 L. TURN SIG. RFLECTR CHECK LAMPS! 2 FRONT FOGLAMP, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 R. TURN SIG. RFLECTR CHECK LAMPS! 2 FRONT FOGLAMP, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 TURN SIGNAL F, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 REAR FOGLAMP CHECK LAMPS! 2 OM_203.book Seite 305 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 In the case of bulb failures in certain lamps, other lamps will substitute. See page 351 for instructions on replacing bulbs. Line 1 Line 2 C* REAR FOGLAMP SWITCH OFF SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 REVERSE LIGHT, L CHECK LAMPS! 2 REVERSE LIGHT, R CHECK LAMPS! 2 TAIL LIGHT, L CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 TAIL LIGHT, R CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 3 The brake lamp comprises several light emitting diodes. The warning message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. SIDELIGHT, L CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 4 Other bulbs will be brought into use as replacements when certain lamps blow. SIDELIGHT, R CHECK LAMPS! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4 2 * C = Category, see page 293 1 The display or the system is malfunctioning. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 2 The brake lamps are switching on after a delay or are permanently on – visit workshop immediately. 305 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 306 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 306 DOOR LAMP SENSOR Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 LAMP SENSOR VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 DOOR OPEN! * C = Category, see page 293 The headlamps will be switched on automatically if the light sensor malfunctions. The individual setting menu “LIGHTING”, “LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” can be set to “MANUAL”. See page 128. It will then be possible to switch the headlamps on and off using the exterior lamp switch. See page 143 for notes on the exterior lamp switch. * C = Category, see page 293. Line 2 C* 1 OM_203.book Seite 307 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 HOOD TRUNK OPEN Line 1 Line 2 TRUNK OPEN! C* Line 1 2 HOOD OPEN! * C = Category, see page 293 Line 2 C* 2 * C = Category, see page 293. See page 318 for hood. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 307 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 308 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 308 TELE AID TELEPHONE – FUNCTION Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE! 3 TELE AID VISIT WORKSHOP!1 1 * C = Category, see page 293. * C = Category, see page 293. The display appears if button í or ì on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone. 1 The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. With this message displayed, one or more functions may not be available. See page 234 for notes on the Tele Aid. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. OM_203.book Seite 309 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 WASHER FLUID When this message appears while the engine is running, the level of the reservoir has dropped to approximately 1/3 of the total volume. The reservoir should be refilled with the prescribed mixture of MB Windshield washer concentrate and water or the concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperature, at the next opportunity. The reservoir for the windshield and headlamp washer systems is located in the engine compartment. Line 1 Line 2 C* WASHER FLUID CHECK LEVEL! 3 See windshield and headlamp washer system on page 323 for instructions on topping up the washer fluid. * C = Category, see page 293. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 309 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 310 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 310 KEY RESTRAINT SYSTEM Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* RESTRAINT SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP! 1 REPLACE KEY1 VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 AUTOM. LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY! 1 * C = Category, see page 293. See page 63 for notes on the seat belts, and page 73 for notes on the airbags. * C = Category, see page 293. 1 Key needs possibly to be replaced. OM_203.book Seite 311 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 UNDERVOLTAGE FUEL RESERVE Line 1 Line 2 C* Line 1 Line 2 C* RESERVE FUEL VISIT FILLING STATION! 2 UNDERVOLTAGE ENGINE ON! 1 UNDERVOLTAGE CONSUMER DEFECTIVE! 1 * C = Category, see page 293. * C = Category, see page 293. Malfunction and warning messages Instruments and controls Operation 311 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 312 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Malfunction and warning messages Practical hints 312 STEERING WHEEL ADJUST Line 1 Line 2 C* STEERING WHEEL ADJUST LOCK! 1 * C = Category, see page 293. For locking the manual steering wheel adjustment, see page 88. Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 313 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Practical hints First aid kit ..................................... 314 Stowing things in the vehicle ...... 314 Fuses ................................................ 315 Hood ................................................. 318 Adding engine oil ..........................321 Automatic transmission fluid level ...................................322 Coolant level ...................................322 Adding coolant ...........................323 Windshield and headlamp washer system ........323 Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment ................325 Contents - Practical hints Instruments and controls Operation TIREFIT, vehicle tools, storage compartment (C 32 AMG only) ....................... 326 Vehicle jack .................................... 327 Wheels ............................................ 328 Tire replacement ....................... 328 Rotating wheels ......................... 329 Spare wheel .................................... 330 Spare wheel bolts ...................... 330 Changing wheels ........................... 331 TIREFIT ........................................... 337 Tire inflation pressure ................. 341 Battery ............................................. 342 Jump starting ................................. 344 Towing the vehicle .........................347 Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ...................350 Exterior lamps ................................ 351 Replacing bulbs .......................... 351 Standby bulb function ...................356 Changing batteries in the electronic main key ..................357 Synchronizing remote control ............................359 Emergency engine shut-down .....359 Fuel filler flap, manual release ...360 Replacing wiper blade insert .......362 Roof rack .........................................363 313 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 314 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display First aid kit First aid kit Practical hints Car care Technical data 314 Stowing things in the vehicle Warning! To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf below the rear window. The first aid kit is located in the storage space (1) in the shelf below the rear window. Lift cover. Remove first aid kit. Index OM_203.book Seite 315 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Fuse box in the passenger compartment Fuses Most of your vehicle’s electrical components are fused with safety fuses. With the exception of the brake lights, all individual lighting system components are electronically fused. Before replacing a blown safety fuse, determine the cause of the short circuit. Always observe amperage and color of fuse. The circuit for components is protected by a cycled circuit breaker interrupted if too much current is being drawn. The circuit closes automatically after a short time; the circuit is broken again if the malfunction reoccurs. Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. 1 Fuse box in passenger compartment A fuse chart is located in fuse box (1). A fuse extractor is located in the auxiliary fuse box in the trunk, see page 317. Fuses Instruments and controls To gain access to fuse box, pull cover away from fuse box (arrow) and remove rearward. 315 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 316 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Fuses Practical hints Car care Technical data 316 Fuse box in engine compartment 2 Cover 5 Fuse box in engine compartment, left-hand side 3 Screw 6 Clamps 4 Retainer To remove cover: Twist screws (3) 90˚ counterclockwise. Pull up cover (2) and slide out retainer (4) and remove it by pulling cover towards front. Install in reverse order. To gain access to fuse box: Release clamps (6) and remove the cover. To close the fuse box: Ensure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned when you replace the cover. Press the cover down by hand and secure with clamps (6). Index OM_203.book Seite 317 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Auxiliary fuse box in the trunk To open: Pull trim panel (1) away. Remove the cover (2) of auxiliary fuse box. Note: In the cover (2) of the auxiliary fuse box the special fuse puller (3) is positioned. To close: Put the cover (2) of auxiliary fuse box on. Press the trim panel (1) on. 1 Trim panel 2 Cover of auxiliary fuse box 3 Special fuse puller Fuses Instruments and controls 317 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 318 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine compartment Hood Warning! To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan blades. If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call a fire department. Practical hints Car care Technical data 318 The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system • with the engine running, • while starting the engine, • if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually. Index OM_203.book Seite 319 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Pull handle (2) to its stop out of radiator grill and open hood (do not pull up on the handle). To open: To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the driver´s side of the instrument panel. At the same time a handle will extend out of the radiator grill. Note: To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open the hood only with the wipers in the parked position. Engine compartment Instruments and controls Operation 319 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 320 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Engine compartment Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 320 To close: Lower the hood and let it drop into lock from a height of approximately 1 ft. (30 cm), assisting with hands placed flat on edges of hood (3). To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not push down on hood to attempt to fully close it. Index OM_203.book Seite 321 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Adding engine oil Unscrew the oil filler cap and add oil carefully if you need to top up the oil. Follow the message appearing on the engine oil level indicator display (page 141) as to quantity to be added. Re-install oil filler cap. Do not overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be drained or siphoned. It could cause damage to engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 1 See malfunction and warning messages on page 293 if an engine oil level display appears on the multifunction indicator when the engine is running. 2 Notes: P 0 1 .0 0 -2 2 1 9 -2 6 See page 141 for engine oil level indicator display. 1 Oil filler cap The dipstick tube allows for draining of oil by using a suction device. 2 Plug of dipstick guide tube The engine oil level can only be checked via the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level ground, with engine at normal operational temperature. Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan. Engine compartment Instruments and controls Operation 321 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 322 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine compartment Automatic transmission fluid level Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 322 Coolant level The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic transmission fluid. Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted. If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmission fluid level. P 2 0 .3 0 -2 1 3 3 -2 6 1 Coolant expansion tank To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine stopped. Check coolant level only when coolant is cold. The coolant level should reach the black top part of the reservoir. See page 385 for antifreeze/anticorrosion mixture. OM_203.book Seite 323 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Windshield and headlamp washer system Adding coolant If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added. Warning! • In order to avoid possibly serious burns: Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. • Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. 1 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). • Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. • Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. Engine compartment Instruments and controls Operation 323 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 324 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Engine compartment Vehicles without headlamp cleaning system: Capacity approximately 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system: Capacity approximately 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) Warning! Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may burn. You can be seriously burned. Practical hints Car care Technical data 324 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing: MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water. 1 part “S” to 100 parts water (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water). For temperatures below freezing: MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze. 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent (40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent). Index OM_203.book Seite 325 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment Lift trunk floor and engage handle in upper edge of trunk. Always lower trunk floor before closing trunk lid. To remove the spare wheel: Take out the vehicle tool kit tray. Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise and remove the spare wheel. To store spare wheel: Place spare wheel in wheel well and secure it with luggage bowl. Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop. Place vehicle tool kit tray in luggage bowl. 1 Vehicle tool kit, towing eye bolt, wheel bolts and jack 2 Spare wheel 3 Storage tray Spare wheel Instruments and controls 325 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 326 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display TIREFIT Practical hints Car care Technical data 326 TIREFIT, vehicle tools, storage compartment (C 32 AMG only) 1 Jack 2 TIREFIT 3 Air pump 4 Vehicle tool kit 5 Towing eye bolt For notes on the TIREFIT and air pump, see page 337. The TIREFIT, vehicle tools and the storage compartment are located below the trunk floor. Index OM_203.book Seite 327 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Vehicle jack To prepare the jack for use: Storing the jack in the trunk: Remove the jack from the spare wheel well under the trunk floor. Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with handle folded in (storage position). Push the crank handle up and turn clockwise until it engages (operational position). Jack Instruments and controls 327 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 328 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care Technical data 328 Warning! Wheels The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase. Tire replacement Front and rear tires should be replaced in sets. Rims and tires must be of the correct size and type. For dimensions, see “Technical Data”. We recommend that you break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed. Index OM_203.book Seite 329 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Rotating wheels It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be fastened to a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm) whenever wheels are mounted. The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel. For rim and tire specifications, refer to “Technical Data”. Rotating, however, should be carried out as recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate. Warning! Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. Notes: When replacing rims, use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident. Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside. The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics and safety of the vehicle. Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove burrs, if any. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see inside of fuel filler flap and also page 282. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 329 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 330 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care Technical data 330 Spare wheel Important! The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full size tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and is fully functional. For additional information, refer to page 378. Spare wheel bolts Warning! Be sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired. 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for steel rims Note: Wheel bolts (2) must be used when mounting steel wheel rim. Index OM_203.book Seite 331 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Changing wheels Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance from the roadway. Warning! 1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning flasher. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. 2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off engine (manual transmission to 1st or reverse gear). 3. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle. On an level road, place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 331 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 332 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 332 P 4 0 .1 0 -2 4 2 6 -2 6 4. Vehicles with steel rims (Canada only) Removal of wheel cover: Reach into two opening of the wheel cover and pull. P 4 0 .1 0 -2 4 2 7 -2 6 5. Remove the two-piece wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit and assemble (see page 327). 6. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts. OM_203.book Seite 333 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 P 4 0 .1 0 -2 4 2 8 -2 6 9. Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and install alignment bolt (1) supplied in the tool kit. Remove the remaining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected from dirt and sand. 7. Place jack on firm ground. Position jack (1) under the take-up bracket (2) so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline. 10. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep hands from beneath the wheels. The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings. 8. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 333 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 334 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Tires, Wheels Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index 334 P 4 0 .1 0 -2 4 2 9 -2 6 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for steel rims 11. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. Install wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. Unscrew the alignment bolt to install the last wheel bolt. OM_203.book Seite 335 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 P 4 0 .1 0 -2 4 3 0 -2 6 12. Lower vehicle and remove jack. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls P 4 0 .1 0 -2 4 3 1 -2 6 13. Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly, following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm). 335 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 336 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care Technical data 336 Notes: Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with handle folded in. For proper storage of vehicle jack see page 325. Warning! Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. P 4 0 .1 0 -2 4 3 2 -2 6 14. Vehicles with steel rims (Canada only) Installation of wheel cover: Position small wheel cover opening over tire valve and press wheel cover against wheel rim. Now press (do not hit) opposite side of wheel cover against wheel rim until seated. Make certain that the springs of the wheel cover are firmly seated in the outer rim of the steel wheel. Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct mounting bolts. Index OM_203.book Seite 337 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 TIREFIT (C 32 AMG only) Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water. Small punctures, particularly those in the tread can be sealed with TIREFIT. If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT, change clothing as soon as possible. Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures down to approx. -4 °F (-20 °C). Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Warning! Do not induce vomiting! Cuts or punctures larger than approx. 0.16 in (4 mm), tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving. TIREFIT should not be used in such circumstances. Consult a physician immediately. Keep away from open flame or heat source. Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances. Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz Center for assistance. Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye and respiratory irritation. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 337 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 338 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels Practical hints Car care Technical data 338 1 P 4 0 .1 0 -2 1 5 8 -2 6 Sealing tire with TIREFIT 1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning flasher. 2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off engine. 3. Take TIREFIT out of trunk, see page 326. 4. Shake contents of TIREFIT container. Screw hose (1) on to TIREFIT container. TIREFIT is now ready for use. 5. Unscrew valve tire cap. Remove tire valve (2) using valve stem removal tool (3). Do not place tire valve in sand or dirt. Index OM_203.book Seite 339 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 6. Remove plug (4) from end of hose (1) and push hose (1) onto valve stem. 7. Hold container upside down (hose down) and squeeze entire contents of container into tire. 8. Pull hose (1) off and screw tire valve (2) using valve stem tool (3) into the valve stem. Note: A spare tire valve is stored with the valve stem tool. 9. Install plug (4) onto end of hose (1). 10. The air pump is located inside the wheel well in the trunk. Observe instructions on air pump label. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 339 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 340 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Tires, Wheels 11. Remove air pump from storage compartment inside trunk. 12. Pull out air hose with pressure gauge (5) and electrical plug (6). 13. Screw filler hose (5) onto tire valve. 14. Plug air pump electrical plug (6) into vehicle cigar lighter. 15. To switch on air pump, turn key in steering lock to position 1. Note: After 5 minutes, pressure gauge must display 26 psi (1.8 bar). Do not exceed the maximum pressure of 36 psi (2.5 bar)! If pressure is not attained, drive vehicle approx. 394 in (10 m), so that the sealing material is evenly distributed inside the tire. Reconnect air pump and inflate tire. Practical hints Car care Technical data 340 Note: Do not operate electric air pump longer that 6 minutes without interruption. Air pump could overheat! After air pump has cooled off, operate air pump again. 16. To switch off air pump, turn key in steering lock to position 0. Warning! If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained, tire is too severely damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair. In this case TIREFIT can not properly seal the tire. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance. 17. Reinstall valve tire cap. 18. Drive vehicle to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Index OM_203.book Seite 341 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Warning! Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to operate at higher speeds. A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended tires as well as for the varying operating conditions. Vehicle handling characteristics may change. Important! After driving vehicle for an initial 10 minutes, check tire pressure. If tire pressure has fallen below 20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the vehicle. Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage – especially in the winter. If tire pressure is at least 20 psi (1.3 bar), inflate tire to correct pressure (see label on fuel filler flap), and drive vehicle to nearest tire repair facility to have tire repaired or replaced. Example: If garage temperature = approximately +68°F (+20°C) and ambient temperature = approximately +32°F (0°C) then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure +3 psi (+0.2 bar). Recommended duration of use: 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) with the recommended tire pressure. Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will become somewhat harder. Notes: If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once TIREFIT sealing material had dried, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in Replace TIREFIT every 3 years. Tires, Wheels Instruments and controls 341 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 342 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Battery Practical hints Car care Technical data 342 warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the pressure listed in the table and the respective operating conditions are taken into consideration. Battery An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread separation, bulging etc. Regular tire pressure checks (including the spare tire) at intervals of no more than 14 days are therefore essential. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for damage. The spare tire should be checked periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary. Warning! Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc. Warning! Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Follow recommended inflation pressures. Important! Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight as indicated by the label on the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. The service life of the battery is dependent on its condition of charge. The battery should always be kept sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length of time. Battery replacement information: The maintenance-free battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side. Index OM_203.book Seite 343 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month, mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for long periods of time. Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s electrical circuit. Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and connect last. When removing and connecting the battery, always make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the electronic key is in starter switch position 0. The battery, its filler caps, the vent tube and the opposite plug must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. Removal of filter box: Release three clamps (1) and remove filter box. Installation of filter box: Install filter box properly and secure with three clamps (1). While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the generator and other electronic components would be damaged. Battery Instruments and controls 343 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 344 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Jump starting Note: The gear selector lever will remain locked in position “P” and the electronic key can not be turned in the starter switch, if the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged. After reconnecting the battery also set the clock (vehicles with COMAND: see COMAND operator’s manual) resynchronize the front seat head restraints, the express feature of the power windows, the sliding/ pop-up roof, and the electronic stability program (see individual settings on page 121, head restraints on page 55, power windows on page 197, synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof on page 202 and electronic stability program on page 278). Battery recycling Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment with improper disposal. Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. Practical hints Car care Technical data 344 Jump starting Warning! Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc. Read all instructions before proceeding. Index OM_203.book Seite 345 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Important! A discharged battery can freeze at approximately +14°F (–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury. Jumper cable specifications: • Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or approximately 2 AWG • Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m). If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another vehicle. 1 Negative (–) under hood terminal 2 Positive (+) under hood terminal Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump starting with more powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side. Jump starting Instruments and controls 345 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 346 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Jump starting Practical hints Car care Technical data 346 Proceed as follows: 1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that the jumper cables will reach, but never let the vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. 2. On both vehicles: • Turn off engine and all lights and accessories, except hazard warning flashers or work lights. • Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to position “P” (manual transmission to Neutral). Important! 3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) under hood terminal of the discharged battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal parts. 4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged battery and the final connection to the negative (–) under hood terminal of the disabled vehicle. Important! 5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move when the engine is started. Allow the discharged battery to charge for a few minutes. Start engine of the disabled vehicle in the usual manner. 6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables by exactly reversing the above installation sequence, starting with the last connection made first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it does not touch any other metal while the other end is still attached. Note: If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic converter. Index OM_203.book Seite 347 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Towing the vehicle Important! When towing the vehicle, please, note the following: Warning! With the automatic central locking activated and the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make certain that the electronic key is in starter switch position 2. If the electronic key is left in the starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove electronic key from starter switch and reinsert. To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking. See the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK” on page 131. When towing another vehicle, observe that the gross vehicle weight of the vehicle being towed does not exceed the towing capacity of your vehicle. Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. Notes: The selector lever will remain locked in position “P” and the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See battery on page 342 or jump starting on page 344. Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking, see page 350. Towing the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 347 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 348 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Towing the vehicle 1 Cover on right side of front bumper Practical hints Car care Technical data 348 2 Cover on right side of rear bumper To remove cover: Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in trunk in spare wheel). Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To remove cover: Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in trunk in spare wheel). Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover: Fit cover and snap into place. To reinstall cover: Fit cover and snap into place. Index OM_203.book Seite 349 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 We recommend that the vehicle be transported using flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing. Warning! With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the braking and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Important! To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Note: Towing restrictions for vehicles with automatic transmission: To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning flasher in use, turn electronic key in starter switch to position 2 and activate combination switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate. The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). The electronic key must be in starter switch position 2. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage. Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports. If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the engine must be shut off (electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Use wheel lift, dolly, or flat bed equipment, with electronic key in starter switch turned to position 0. Switch off the tow-away alarm (see page 47) as well as the ESP (see page 278). Towing the vehicle Instruments and controls Caution! Operation 349 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 350 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Towing the vehicle Practical hints Car care Technical data 350 Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking To do so, open storage compartment in front of center armrest. Using a small coin, release the coin holder (1) and swing it aside. Insert a tool (2), e.g. the screw driver, into the opening below the coin holder. While pushing the tool down, move selector lever from position “P”. After removal of the tool from the opening, reinstall the coin holder. The selector lever is locked again when moving it to position “P”. P 2 7 .6 0 -2 1 9 7 -2 6 In the case of power failure the transmission selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. Index OM_203.book Seite 351 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Exterior lamps Replacing bulbs Headlamp adjustment Warning! Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Check and readjust headlamps at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. Warning! Notes: Bulbs and bulb holders can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off lamp prior to replacing a bulb. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you: When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with the specified watt rating. • touch or move it when hot, When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a clean cloth. • drop the bulb, • scratch the bulb. If the newly installed bulb does not light up, switch the lamp off and on again. If the bulb still does not light up, have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Wear eye and hand protection. Exterior lamps Instruments and controls 351 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 352 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps Practical hints Car care Technical data 352 Headlamp assembly 1 Headlamp cover for low beam headlamp 3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 2 Headlamp cover for parking and standing lamp, and high beam headlamp 4 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb (Halogen type) 5 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp Index OM_203.book Seite 353 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Bulbs for high and low beam H7 (55 W) Turn signal lamp 1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp) Open hood. Open hood. Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover (1 or 2). Twist bulb socket (3) counterclockwise and pull out. Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. Pull electrical connector off. Unclip the retainer spring and take out the bulb. Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. Reinstall bulb socket. Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder. Clip in retainer springs and plug the connector onto the bulb. Parking and standing lamp W 5W Align headlamp cover (1 or 2) and click into place. Open hood. Xenon (optional) Bulb for low beam Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover (2). Pull out bulb socket (6). Remove bulb from socket. Insert new bulb in socket and push in. Reinstall bulb socket. Warning! Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. Exterior lamps Instruments and controls Align headlamp cover (2) and click into place. 353 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 354 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps Practical hints Car care Technical data 354 Taillamp assemblies Open trunk lid. Fold trim to the side. Turn locking lever (1) to vertical position and remove bulb carrier. 2 Driver’s side: rear fog lamp (P 21 W/32 cp bulb) 3 Backup lamp (P 21 W/32 cp bulb) Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 4 Stop lamp (P 21 W/32 cp bulb) Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. Reinstall bulb socket. 6 tail, parking, standing and side marker lamp (R 5 W/4 cp bulb) Reinstall trim. 5 Turn signal lamp (PY 21 W bulb [yellow]) Index OM_203.book Seite 355 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 License plate lamp Side marker lamp, front (5 W/4 cp bulb) 1 2 Loosen both securing screws (1), remove lamp and replace tubular lamp (C 5 W/4 cp). Carefully slide lamp towards rear (arrow 1), and remove front end first (arrow 2). Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out. Remove bulb from socket. Insert new bulb in socket. Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist clockwise. To reinstall lamp, set rear end of lamp in bumper and let front end snap into place. Exterior lamps Instruments and controls 355 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 356 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Exterior lamps High mounted stop lamp, Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror The high mounted stop lamp (3rd brake lamp) is equipped with LEDs. The additional turn signals on the exterior mirrors are equipped with incadescent bulbs. Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if a malfunction occurs. Practical hints Car care Technical data 356 Standby bulb function The stop lamps, dimmed, will act as a replacement lamp, if one taillamp stops working. The left stop lamp acts as a replacement for the rear fog lamp, if it stops working. The respective fog lamp, dimmed, will act as a replacement lamp, if the left or right standing lamp stops working. Notes: The multifunction display will indicate that a bulb has failed. See malfunction and warning messages on page 293. Index OM_203.book Seite 357 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Changing batteries in the electronic key 2 1 3 4 P 8 0 .2 0 -2 2 0 1 -2 6 P 8 0 .3 5 -2 0 2 9 -2 6 1 Transmit buttons Changing batteries 2 Lamp for battery check and function control Move locking tab (3) in direction of right arrow and remove mechanical key (4, left arrow). Checking batteries If one of the transmit buttons (1) is pressed, the battery check lamp (2) lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are in order. Change batteries if the battery check lamp (2) does not light up briefly. Electronic key Instruments and controls 357 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 358 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Electronic key Practical hints Technical data Car care Index 358 7 8 5 4 6 P 8 0 .3 5 -2 0 2 5 -2 6 Insert mechanical key (4) in side opening (5) to open latch. Press briefly (do not use mechanical key as lever) to release battery compartment. Remove mechanical key from side opening. Carefully remove battery compartment in direction of arrow (6). P 8 0 .3 5 -2 0 2 7 -2 6 Change batteries (7), inserting new ones under contact spring (8) with plus (+) side facing up. Return battery compartment into housing until locked in place and slide mechanical key back into electronic key. OM_203.book Seite 359 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Important! Emergency engine shut-down Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation on battery package. If the engine can no longer be stopped using the electronic key, the engine can be turned off by removing two fuses. Replacement Battery: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent. For easy removal of fuses use the fuse extractor (located in the auxiliary fuse box in the trunk) to pull out the fuses marked on the fuse chart as “ENGINE EMERGENCY OFF”. Synchronizing remote control The fuse chart is located in the fuse box in the passenger compartment. For fuses see page 315. The remote control may have to be resynchronized, if the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked. To synchronize insert electronic key in starter switch. The remote control should once again be operational. Emergency engine shut-down Instruments and controls Operation 359 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 360 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Fuel filler flap, manual release Practical hints Car care Technical data 360 Fuel filler flap, manual release Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof Open the trunk lid and fold right-side taillamp trim aside. Reach inside and turn the release knob (arrow) clockwise. Open the fuel filler flap. The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur. The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the lens (1) of the interior overhead light. Pry off the lens (1) using a screwdriver. Index OM_203.book Seite 361 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Slide both locking tabs (2) in direction of arrow, lower rear of cover and remove. Obtain crank (3) (supplied with vehicle) and insert through hole. Note: To slide roof closed or to raise the roof at the rear: turn crank clockwise. Do not disconnect electrical connectors. To slide the roof open or to lower the roof at the rear: turn crank counterclockwise. See page 202 for instructions on synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof after closing manually. Emergency operation of sliding / pop-up roof Instruments and controls Operation Driving 361 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 362 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Replacing wiper blade insert Practical hints Car care Technical data 362 Replacing wiper blade inserts For safety reasons, remove electronic key from steering lock before replacing the wiper blades, otherwise the motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury. Notes: Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward. Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be scratched or broken. Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage. Removal: Fold wiper arm forward. Press safety tab down (1), push wiper blade downward (2) and remove. Index OM_203.book Seite 363 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Roof rack Place wiper blade on firm support. Press down both tabs and slide (direction of arrow) the wiper blade insert out of the retainer claws. Only mount roof racks to the fastening bolts (see arrows) located under the door weatherstrips. Use only those roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz to avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions. Installation: Slide (direction of arrow) wiper blade insert into retainer claws until tabs are engaged. Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until it locks in place. Replacing wiper blade insert Instruments and controls Operation 363 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 364 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 OM_203.book Seite 365 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle .............................366 Power washer ..............................367 Tar stains .....................................367 Paintwork, painted body components .................................367 Engine cleaning ..........................368 Vehicle washing .........................368 Contents - Vehicle care Instruments and controls Operation Ornamental moldings ............... 369 Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses ...................... 369 Window cleaning ....................... 369 Wiper blade ................................ 369 Light alloy wheels ..................... 370 Instrument cluster ..................... 370 Steering wheel and gear selector lever ..................... 370 Cup holder ...................................370 Seat belts ..................................... 371 Headliner and shelf below rear window ........... 371 Leather upholstery ..................... 371 Hard plastic trim items ............. 371 Plastic and rubber parts ............ 371 365 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 366 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Cleaning and care of the vehicle Warning! Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage. Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt, tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eli minates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences. Practical hints Car care Technical data 366 More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during winter operation. You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of corrosion. In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be reundercoated. Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a waxbase rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later. We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Index OM_203.book Seite 367 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Tar stains Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended. The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products. Paintwork, painted body components Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”, normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and washing detergent used. Additional information can be found in the booklet titled “Vehicle Care Guide”. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of gloss). Power washer When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions. Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors etc.). Caution! Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 367 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 368 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Practical hints Car care Technical data 368 Engine cleaning Vehicle washing Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents. Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo. Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently. Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. Due to the width of the vehicle, prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold back the outside mirrors to prevent them from getting damaged. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible. When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. Index OM_203.book Seite 369 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Ornamental moldings Window cleaning For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chromeplated parts, use a chrome cleaner. Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. Note: Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove electronic key from starter switch before cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury. Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water. To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. Wiper blades Clean the wiper blade rubbers with a clean cloth and detergent solution. Note: For safety reasons, remove electronic key from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 369 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 370 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Cleaning and care of the vehicle Practical hints Car care Technical data 370 Light alloy wheels Instrument cluster Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels. Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. If possible, clean wheels once a week with MercedesBenz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water. Follow instructions on container. Steering wheel and gear selector lever Note: Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could lead to corrosion. Cup holder Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents. Index OM_203.book Seite 371 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Seat belts Leather upholstery The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented. Warning! Leather Upholstery Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Headliner and shelf below rear window Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. MB Tex Upholstery Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. Hard plastic trim items Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. Plastic and rubber parts Do not use oil or wax on these parts. Cleaning and care of the vehicle Instruments and controls Operation 371 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 372 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 OM_203.book Seite 373 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Technical data Spare parts service ........................ 374 Warranty coverage ......................... 374 Identification labels .......................375 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............ 376 Technical data ................................377 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. capacities ...................................381 Engine oils ......................................383 Contents - Technical data Instruments and controls Operation Engine oil additives ...................... 383 Air conditioner refrigerant .......... 383 Brake fluid ...................................... 383 Premium unleaded gasoline ........ 384 Fuel requirements ........................ 384 Gasoline additives ......................... 385 Coolants .......................................... 385 Consumer information ................. 387 Uniform tire quality grading ....... 387 373 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 374 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Car care Technical data 374 Spare parts service Warranty coverage All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of original spare parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the “warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet and your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: More than 300 000 different spare parts, for Mercedes-Benz models, are available. Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should be installed. Important! The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or compromise its durability or safety. 1. New vehicle limited warranty 2. Emission systems warranty 3. Emission performance warranty 4. California, Massachusetts, and Vermont emission control systems warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. Index OM_203.book Seite 375 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Identification labels 2 1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (below right front passenger seat) Technical data Instruments and controls 375 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 376 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Technical data Car care 376 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 5 6 4 5 3 6 1 7 4 2 3 P 0 1 .0 0 -2 2 2 0 -2 6 3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield) 1 Automatic belt tensioner 4 Engine number 2 Crankshaft 5 Emission control label 3 Air conditioner compressor 6 Information label, California version Vacuum line routing for emission control system 4 Generator (alternator) When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers. 5 Idler pulley 6 Power steering pump 7 Coolant pump, fan Index OM_203.book Seite 377 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Technical data Model C 240 (203.0611) C 320 (203.0641) C 32 AMG (203.0651) Engine 112 112 112 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 6 6 6 Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.54 in (89.90 mm) Stroke 2.68 in (68.20 mm) 3.30 in (84.00 mm) 3 3.30 in (84.00 mm) 3 Total piston displacement 158,5 cu.in. (2597 cm ) 195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm ) 195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3) Compression ratio 10:1 10:1 9.0:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 167 hp/6000 rpm (125 kW/6000 rpm) 221 hp/5600 rpm (165 kW/5600 rpm) 349 hp/6100 rpm (260 kW/6100 rpm) Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 177 ft.lb/4500 rpm (240 Nm/4500 rpm) 228 ft.lb/3000 rpm (310 Nm/3000 rpm) 333 ft.lb/4400 rpm (450 Nm/4400 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6200 rpm 6000 rpm 6200 rpm Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5 Poly-V-belt 2390 mm 2390 mm 2390 mm 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. Technical data Instruments and controls 377 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 378 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints Car care Technical data 378 Rims — Tires Model C 320 (203.064) C 240 (Canada only) Rims (light alloy) 7J x 16 H2 7J x 16 H2 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm) (steel rims) 7J x 16 H2 Front axle: 71/2 J x 17 H 2 Rear axle: 81/2 J x 17 H 2 Front axle: 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm) Rear axle: 1.34 in (34 mm) All season tires: Radial-ply tires 205/55 R16 91 H 205/55 R16 91 H 205/55 R 16 91 H – Summer tires: Radial-ply tires – – – Front axle: 225/45 R 17 91 Y3 Rear axle: 245/40 R 17 91 Y2, 4 205/55 R16 91 H M+S 205/55 R16 91 H M+S 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S – Rim (steel rim) Wheel offset: 7J x 16 H2 1.46 in (37 mm) 7J x 16 H2 1.46 in (37 mm) 7J x 16 H2 1.46 in (37 mm) – – All season tires: Radial-ply tires 205/55 R16 91 H 205/55 R16 91 H 205/55 R16 91 H – Winter tires: Radial-ply tires C 240 (203.061) C 32 AMG (203.065) Spare wheel 2 Must not be used with snow chains. 3 Also permissible: 225/45 ZR 17 91 Y. 4 Also permissible: 245/40 ZR 17 91 Y2. Index OM_203.book Seite 379 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Electrical system Model C 240 (203.061) C 320 (203.064) C 32 AMG (203.065) Generator (alternator) 14 V/120 A 14 V/120 A 14 V/120 A Starter motor 12V/1.7 kW 12V/1.7 kW 12V/1.7 kW Battery 12V/100 Ah 12V/100 Ah 12V/74 Ah Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPER Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2 NGK IFR 5 D 10 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) Bosch F 8 DPER Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2 NGK IFR 5 D 10 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) NGK IFR 6 D 10 Electrode gap Tightening torque 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm) Weights Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Technical data Instruments and controls 379 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 380 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Technical data Practical hints 380 Main Dimensions Model C 240 (203.061) C 320 (203.064) Overall vehicle length 178.2 in (4526 mm) 178.2 in (4526 mm) Overall vehicle width 68.0 in (1728 mm) 68.0 in (1728 mm) Overall vehicle height C 32 AMG (203.065) 56.3 in (1429 mm) 56.1 in (1426 mm) Wheel base 106.9 in (2715 mm) 106.9 in (2715 mm) Track, front 58.8 in (1493 mm) 58.8 in (1494 mm) Track, rear 57.6 in (1464 mm) 58.0 in (1474 mm) Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 381 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Center. Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Engine with oil filter 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Recommended engine oils Automatic transmission 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Automatic transmission fluid Rear axle 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power steering fluid Front wheel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease Brake system approx. 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake fluid (DOT 4+) Cooling system approx. 6.8 US qt (6.4 l) C 32 AMG only: approx. 15.3 US qt (14.5 l) MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze Fuel tank 16.4 US gal (62.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON) including a reserve of 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Instruments and controls Operation Driving 381 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 382 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data 382 Capacity Air conditioner system Windshield washer and Vehicles without headlamp cleaning headlamp cleaning system: Capacity approx. 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) system Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant (Never R-12) MB Windshield washer concentrate1 Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system: Capacity approx. 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see page 324. Index OM_203.book Seite 383 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Engine oils Air conditioner refrigerant Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil is used in the air conditioner system. Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, otherwise damage to the system will occur. Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Brake fluid During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be harmful to the engine operation. The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two years, preferably in the spring. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Instruments and controls Operation Driving It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information. 383 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 384 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Practical hints Car care Technical data 384 Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Caution! Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM standard D 439: To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions: The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2). This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. • have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible, • avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration, • do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage, • do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%. The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure etc. Index OM_203.book Seite 385 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Gasoline additives Coolants A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits. The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: • corrosion protection, • freeze protection, After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as: • boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point). The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately - 22°F (- 30°C) and corrosion protection. • warm-up hesitation, If the antifreeze mixture is effective to - 22°F (- 30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). • unstable idle, • knocking/pinging, • misfire, The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every 3 years. • power loss. Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel. They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be harmful to the engine operation. To provide the important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equals a freeze protection to approximately - 22°F (- 30°C). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approximately - 49°F (- 45°C), the engine temperature Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities Instruments and controls Operation Driving 385 Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 386 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze. If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/ antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If your are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminium parts. The use of aluminium components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminium parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/ antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.) Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz anticorrosion/antifreeze agent. Practical hints Car care Technical data 386 Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in the hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity Approximately freeze protection – 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C) 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) C 32 AMG only: 7.7 US qt (7.3 l) 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Index OM_203.book Seite 387 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Consumer information may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. This has been prepared as required of all manufactures of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Warning! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and Consumer information Instruments and controls Operation 387 Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 388 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Consumer information Practical hints Car care Technical data 388 Temperature Warning! The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire‘s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure. Index OM_203.book Seite 389 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Index Audio systems .................................................................108 Cassette player .......................................................... 110 CD Player ....................................................................109 Radio ...........................................................................108 Automatic central locking ..............................................40 Automatic climate control ............................................160 Activated charcoal filter ...........................................168 Adjustable air outlets, rear passenger compartment .............................172 Air recirculation ........................................................167 Air volume, manual ..................................................165 Basic setting ...............................................................164 Defrosting ...................................................................166 Display and controls .................................................162 Dust filter ...................................................................164 Economy mode ..........................................................169 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ....................... 171 Residual engine heat utilization .............................169 Special settings .........................................................165 Windows fogged up on the outside ........................166 Automatic transmission ................................................251 Fluid level .................................................................. 322 Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ............................................ 350 A Adding engine oil ..........................................................321 Airbags .............................................................................. 73 ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Malfunction and warning message ........................297 Antilock brake system (ABS) ....................................... 276 Antitheft alarm system ................................................... 46 Ashtrays .......................................................................... 213 Audio system Button and soft key operation ..................................176 Cassette mode ........................................................... 182 CD changer ................................................................ 187 CD mode ..................................................................... 186 Operating and display elements ............................. 174 Operating safety ........................................................ 173 Operation ....................................................................176 Operation Audio and telephone .............................. 173 Radio mode ................................................................ 179 Telephone operation ................................................. 190 Index Instruments and controls 389 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 390 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 390 B BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ..................... 70 Battery .............................................................................342 Block heater ....................................................................270 Brake assist system (BAS) ............................................275 Bulbs See Replacing bulbs ................................................. 351 C CD changer See CD changer installed ......................................... 187 Cellular telephone .........................................................224 Center console .................................................................. 24 Central locking switch .................................................... 39 Central locking system ................................................... 31 Automatic central locking .........................................40 Central locking switch ............................................... 39 Choosing global or selective mode ........................... 33 Doors ............................................................................. 37 General notes ............................................................... 30 Locking and unlocking with remote control ..........33 Mechanical keys .......................................................... 36 Obtaining replacement keys .....................................29 Summer opening/convenience feature ...................35 Vehicle keys .................................................................28 Check regularly and before a long trip ...................... 284 Child seat See Infant and child restraint systems ....................83 Climate control ...............................................................152 Adjustable air outlets, rear passenger compartment .............................172 Air recirculation ........................................................158 Basic setting ...............................................................156 Defrosting ...................................................................157 Display and controls .................................................154 Dust filter ...................................................................155 Economy mode ..........................................................159 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ....................... 171 Residual engine heat utilization .............................159 Special settings .........................................................156 Windows fogged up on the inside ..........................157 Windows fogged up on the outside ................157, 166 COMAND, radio and telephone .................................. 232 Combination switch .......................................................148 Control and operation of radio transmitters .................................................... 232 Coolant level .................................................................. 322 Coolant temperature gauge ..........................................137 Index OM_203.book Seite 391 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) .............................................................................72 Emergency trunk lid release button .............................44 Emergency unlocking in case of accident ...................40 Engine oil consumption ................................................142 Engine oil level indicator .............................................. 141 Enlarged cargo area .......................................................221 Express opening and closing (power windows) .......................................................198 Exterior lamp switch .....................................................143 Daytime running lamp mode ..................................145 Exterior lamps ................................................................351 Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror ........................................ 356 Bulbs for high and low beam ................................. 353 Headlamp assembly ................................................. 352 High mounted stop lamp ......................................... 356 License plate lamps ................................................. 355 Parking and standing lamp .................................... 353 Replacing bulbs .........................................................351 Side marker lamp, front .......................................... 355 Taillamp assemblies ................................................ 354 Turn signal lamp ...................................................... 353 Exterior mirror adjustment ............................................ 91 Exterior mirror, front passenger side, parking position ....................92 Cruise control .................................................................272 Cup holder ...................................................................... 211 D Dashboard .........................................................................22 Door control panel ........................................................... 20 Door entry lamps ...........................................................204 Drive sensibly - Save Fuel ............................................ 261 E Easy-entry/exit feature ................................................... 48 Electronic key ...................................................................29 Changing batteries ...................................................357 Electronic main key Synchronizing remote control ................................359 Electronic stability program (ESP) ...........................................................................278 Emergency call See Tele Aid ...............................................................234 Emergency engine shut-down .....................................359 Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof ...................................................360 Index Instruments and controls 391 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 392 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 392 F H First aid kit ..................................................................... 314 Flat tire See Changing wheels ............................................... 331 Flexible service system (FSS) ............................................................................ 138 Front airbags ....................................................................73 Front center console storage compartment ventilation ........................... 171 Front seat adjustment ..................................................... 49 Fuel filler flap, manual release ...................................360 Fuel reserve warning ....................................................290 Fuse box .......................................................................... 315 Fuses ................................................................................ 315 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................... 151 Head restraints Rear seat .......................................................................60 Head restraints, front seats Removal and installation ...........................................55 Headlamp cleaning system ...........................................147 Headlamp mode ..............................................................144 Heated seats ......................................................................58 High beams See Combination switch ..........................................148 G Garage door opener .......................................................226 Global locking See Central locking system ....................................... 31 Glove box .........................................................................208 I Identification labels ...................................................... 375 Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ................ 286 Individual settings ......................................................... 121 "CONVENIENCE" (vehicles with memory function) ......................134 "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER" .......................................124 "LIGHTING" ................................................................128 "VEHICLE" ................................................................. 131 Infant and child restraint systems ................................83 Child seat mounts .......................................................86 Installation ...................................................................85 Index OM_203.book Seite 393 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 K Information call See Tele Aid ...............................................................234 Instrument cluster ........................................................... 98 Instruments and controls ............................................... 18 Center console .............................................................24 Dashboard ....................................................................22 Door control panel ......................................................20 Overhead control panel .............................................. 21 Interior ............................................................................207 Interior lighting .............................................................203 Keys, changing battery ................................................. 357 Keys, vehicle .....................................................................28 L Lamps, exterior Side marker lamp, front .......................................... 355 Lighter ............................................................................. 215 Loading instructions (Vehicle with enlarged cargo area) ....................... 223 Locator lighting ..............................................................147 Locking the vehicle with remote control .....................33 Low beams See Exterior lamps ....................................................351 J Jack ...................................................................................327 Jump starting ..................................................................344 Index Instruments and controls 393 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 394 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 394 M N Maintenance ...................................................................233 Malfunction/warning message memory .....................119 Manual seat ............................................................... 52, 56 Manual transmission ....................................................249 Mechanical key ......................................................... 28, 36 Memory function .............................................................95 Mirror, exterior, parking position, front passenger side ................... 92 Multicontour seat ............................................................57 Multifunction display .................................................... 102 Coolant temperature ................................................. 106 Engine oil level indicator ......................................... 106 FSS .............................................................................. 106 Individual settings .................................................... 121 Tire inflation pressure monitor .............................. 106 Trip and main odometer .......................................... 106 Vehicle speed ............................................................. 106 Multifunction steering wheel ...................................... 102 Navigation system .......................................................... 116 Night security illumination ..........................................146 O On-board diagnostic system ........................................ 286 Overhead control panel ...................................................21 P Panic button ......................................................................36 Parcel net in front passenger footwell ........................ 216 Parking brake ................................................................ 260 Power windows ...............................................................197 Blocking of rear door window operation ...............199 Express opening and closing ..................................198 Opening and closing ...................................................35 Synchronizing power windows ...............................199 Problems with your vehicle ............................................ 14 Product information .......................................................... 7 Index OM_203.book Seite 395 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 R Unfastening ..................................................................67 Warning lamp ........................................................... 292 Seat belts and integrated restraint system ..................63 Seats Front seat adjustment ................................................49 Heated seat ...................................................................58 Manual seat ..................................................................52 Multicontour seat ........................................................57 Power seat ....................................................................50 Selective locking See Central locking system ....................................... 31 Setting the audio volume ..............................................136 Side impact airbags ......................................................... 76 Side marker lamp .......................................................... 355 Ski sack ........................................................................... 216 Sliding/pop-up roof ....................................................... 200 Opening and closing ...................................................35 Synchronizing .......................................................... 202 SOS-call See Tele Aid .............................................................. 234 Spare wheel bolts ............................................................................ 330 Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment .... 325 Split folding rear seat bench ........................................221 Standby bulb function .................................................. 356 Start lock-out .....................................................................30 Radio See Radio mode ......................................................... 179 Rain sensor ..................................................................... 149 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets 172 Rear window defroster .................................................. 170 Rear window sunshade .................................................205 Removal and installation of front seat head restraints ... 55 Replacement keys Obtaining .....................................................................29 Replacing bulbs .............................................................. 351 Replacing wiper blade insert .......................................362 Reporting Safety Defects ................................................ 15 REST .........................................................................159, 169 Roadside assistance call See Tele Aid ...............................................................234 Roof rack .........................................................................363 S Seat belt nonusage warning system .............................64 Seat belts ...........................................................................63 Fastening ...................................................................... 66 Operation .....................................................................67 Index Instruments and controls 395 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 396 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Instruments and controls Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Index Practical hints Car care Technical data 396 Starter switch .................................................................246 Starting and turning off the engine ............................248 STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. malfunction and warning messages ...................... 312 Steering lock See starter switch ......................................................246 Steering wheel Easy-entry/exit feature .............................................. 48 Steering wheel adjustment electrical ....................................................................... 89 manual ..........................................................................88 Storage compartments and armrests ..........................207 Storing mirror positions ................................................. 91 Storing seat positions ...................................................... 51 Stowing things in the vehicle ...................................... 314 Sun visors .......................................................................206 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ......................... 71 T Technical data ................................................................377 Tele Aid ...........................................................................234 Emergency calls ........................................................235 Information ................................................................239 Initiating an emergency call ...................................237 Roadside Assistance ................................................ 238 Telephone .........................................................................111 Incoming call ............................................................. 115 Redialing .................................................................... 113 Telephone book ..........................................................111 Telephone, general ........................................................ 225 Telephones and two-way radios .................................. 232 Telescoping steering column malfunction and warning messages ...................... 312 The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ............................... 233 Tire inflation pressure ..................................................341 TIREFIT ...................................................................326, 337 Sealing tire with TIREFIT ........................................ 338 Tool kit ............................................................................ 325 Tool kit (C 32 AMG only) ............................................. 326 Tow-away alarm ................................................................47 Towing the vehicle ........................................................ 347 Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ................................................. 350 Trip computer ................................................................. 117 Trunk ................................................................................. 41 Opening ........................................................................34 Release switch .............................................................45 Trunk lamp .......................................................................45 Index OM_203.book Seite 397 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 W Trunk lid Emergency release ..................................................... 44 Trunk lid emergency release .........................................43 Warning lamps See Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster .............................................. 286 What you should know at the gas station ................. 282 Wheels ............................................................................ 328 Where to find it ................................................................ 13 Window curtain airbag .................................................... 76 Windows See Power windows ...................................................197 Windshield washer system .......................................... 323 Wiper blade Replacing insert ....................................................... 362 Wiper operation See Combination switch ..........................................148 U Unlocking the vehicle with remote control .................33 V Vanity mirrors ................................................................206 Vehicle keys ...................................................................... 28 Vehicle tools ....................................................................325 Vehicle tools (C 32 AMG only) .....................................326 Index Instruments and controls 397 Operation Driving Instrument cluster display Practical hints Car care Technical data Index OM_203.book Seite 398 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 OM_203.book Seite 399 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 OM_203.book Seite 400 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 OM_203.book Seite 401 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com. Warning! To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Title illustration no. P00.00-3093-26 Press time 05/18/01 GSP/SIP Printed in Germany OM_203.book Seite 402 Donnerstag, 31. Mai 2001 11:57 11 Order No. 6515 0070 13 Part No. 203 584 29 82 USA Edition A 2002 Please observe the following: BOOKSPINE for Operator’s Manual 5 /8 in. (1.6 cm) 203 3.5“ (8.9 cm) Operator’s Manual C-Class Please ensure the correct position of model code and model name